WO2022027543A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022027543A1
WO2022027543A1 PCT/CN2020/107660 CN2020107660W WO2022027543A1 WO 2022027543 A1 WO2022027543 A1 WO 2022027543A1 CN 2020107660 W CN2020107660 W CN 2020107660W WO 2022027543 A1 WO2022027543 A1 WO 2022027543A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
scg
information
indication
period
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/107660
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡星星
张宏平
孙慧明
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/107660 priority Critical patent/WO2022027543A1/en
Priority to CN202080104496.0A priority patent/CN116134864A/en
Publication of WO2022027543A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022027543A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • a terminal device when a terminal device does not need to use a secondary cell group (SCG) to provide communication services for itself, it can be temporarily suspended (suspended)
  • the SCG for example, suspends the configuration of the SCG and does not transmit data through the SCG, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and the network device.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device needs to use the SCG to provide communication services for itself, the terminal device can restore (restore) the configuration of the SCG, and can also perform data transmission through the SCG to meet the terminal device's demand for data transmission rate.
  • the terminal device may perform operations such as signal quality detection, there may still be unnecessary high energy consumption.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for reducing power consumption of a terminal device.
  • a communication method comprising: when a secondary cell group SCG of a terminal device is in a deactivated state, the terminal device obtains a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period ; When the SCG is in an active state, the terminal device obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period; the terminal device obtains, according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result, Perform radio link monitoring or link recovery procedures on the SCG.
  • the terminal device evaluates the link signal quality of the SCG by using evaluation periods corresponding to the case of suspending the SCG and the case of resuming the SCG respectively.
  • the evaluation periods corresponding to different SCG states it is possible to take into account the The power consumption of the terminal equipment and the accuracy of the evaluation results, so that the wireless link monitoring or link recovery process can be performed more flexibly.
  • a longer evaluation period can be used; in the case of resuming the SCG, a shorter evaluation period can be used, so that the energy consumption of the terminal device in the suspended SCG state is lower than that of the non-SCG state. Power consumption in suspended SCG state.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is the The primary or secondary node of the end device.
  • the first evaluation period may be notified by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the present implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is the terminal device primary or secondary node. The terminal device determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the terminal device may determine the first evaluation period according to the first scaling factor from the network device, according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor (for example, scaling the third evaluation period according to the first scaling factor) , and then obtain the first evaluation period).
  • the present implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
  • the size of the evaluation period can be prevented from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the terminal The device consumes unnecessary power.
  • the method further includes: according to the first indication period, the physical layer of the terminal device reports indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack; or, according to the second indication period, The physical layer of the terminal device reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • different indication periods can be selected according to the current state of the SCG of the terminal device (ie, the deactivated state or the activated state) to report indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the first indication period is selected to report the indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack
  • the second indication period is selected to report the indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the The primary or secondary node of the end device.
  • the first indication period may be notified by the network device to the terminal device.
  • this implementation can avoid the influence of the size of the indication period by whether the measured cell is configured with parameters such as DXR and DRX period size. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the terminal device The primary node or secondary node; the terminal device determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • the terminal device may determine the first indication period according to the second scaling factor from the network device, according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor (for example, scaling the third indication period according to the second scaling factor) , and then obtain the first indication period).
  • this implementation can avoid the influence of the size of the indication period by whether the measured cell is configured with parameters such as DXR and DRX period size. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  • the size of the indication period can be prevented from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the terminal The device consumes unnecessary power.
  • the method further includes: when the SCG is in a deactivated state, the terminal device receives first information from the master node; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information ; the activated TCI state information is used by the terminal equipment to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG.
  • Obtaining, by the terminal device, a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period includes: the terminal device, based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information, obtains, according to the first evaluation period, the link signal quality of the SCG. The first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG.
  • the active TCI state information can be sent to the terminal device by the master node sending the active TCI state information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can evaluate the link signal quality of the SCG according to the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI status information, so as to prevent the terminal device from being unable to obtain the activated TCI status of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus unable to perform RLM or linking on the SCG. Problems with the road restoration process.
  • the first information is a first radio resource control RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message
  • the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message
  • the second RRC message is an RRC message from the secondary node.
  • the secondary node when the SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state, the secondary node can send the second RRC message to the master node, and the master node sends the first RRC message including the second RRC message to the terminal device, thereby activating the TCI. Status information is sent to the end device.
  • the master node since the master node does not need to parse the second RRC message, the effect of sending the activated TCI state information from the slave node to the terminal device can be achieved without occupying too many resources of the master node.
  • the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE.
  • the master node can send the activated TCI status information to the terminal device by sending an RRC message or a MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • the terminal device can know whether the activated TCI state information included in the first information is the TCI state information of the MCG or the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • a communication method comprising: a network device sending first indication information to a terminal device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period or a first scaling factor;
  • the network device is the primary node or the secondary node of the terminal device.
  • the first evaluation period is used to instruct the terminal device to obtain a first evaluation result according to the first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the first evaluation result is used to evaluate the SCG Perform wireless link monitoring or perform a link recovery process; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period or the second scaling factor; wherein, The first indication period is used to instruct the terminal device to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to The terminal device is instructed to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • a communication method includes: a master node receives second information from a secondary node, the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used for the
  • the terminal equipment receives the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the primary node sends first information to the terminal equipment, the first information includes all
  • the active TCI status information is described above.
  • the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message
  • the first information is a first RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes the second RRC message
  • the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • a communication method comprising: a secondary node sending second information to a master node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used for the terminal
  • the device receives the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
  • the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
  • a communication method comprising: a terminal device fails to detect a beam beam of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first cell is the SCG The PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG; the terminal device initiates a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cell PSCell in the SCG.
  • the terminal device when the SCG is in the deactivated state, when the beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the terminal device performs the random access procedure in the PSCell, so that the link recovery process to the PSCell or the SCell can be successfully completed. .
  • the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell; the method further includes: the terminal device, after the random access procedure, switches from the first BWP to the PSCell's dormant dormant BWP.
  • the PSCell can be restored to the deactivated state, so as to save the power of the terminal device, and at the same time reduce the network side re-send the terminal device to enter the deactivated state. command, also reduces overhead.
  • the first BWP is the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • the terminal device when the SCG is in the deactivated state, when the beam failure of the PSCell or SCell is detected, the terminal device can initiate a random access procedure in the dormant BWP of the PSCell to restore the link of the PSCell or SCell. can be successfully completed.
  • the method further includes: after the random access procedure is successful, the terminal device sends a first medium access control element MAC to the secondary node CE; the first MAC CE, used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
  • the terminal device sends the first medium access control element MAC CE to the secondary node, so that the link recovery process to the first cell can be successfully completed.
  • a communication method comprising: when the SCG is in a deactivated state, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node; the fourth indication information is used to indicate the SCG in the SCG The beam beam of the first cell fails; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
  • the terminal device when the SCG is in the deactivated state, can notify the secondary node of the failure of the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG by sending the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node. This avoids the problem that the terminal equipment cannot notify the secondary node of the beam beam failure of the first cell because the SCG is in a deactivated state.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • the terminal device can notify the secondary node of the failure of the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG by sending an RRC message or a MAC CE from the primary node to the secondary node.
  • a communication method comprising: a secondary node of a terminal device receiving a fourth indication message from a master node of the terminal device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate the first indication message in the secondary cell group SCG Beam beam failure for a cell.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • a communication device in an eighth aspect, includes: a processing unit, configured to obtain a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state; When the SCG is in the active state, obtain a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period; the processing unit is further configured to perform wireless radio on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result. Link monitoring or performing link recovery procedures.
  • the communication apparatus further includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is The primary node or secondary node of the terminal device.
  • the communication apparatus further includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is the The master node or the slave node of the terminal device; the processing unit further determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
  • the processing unit further enables the physical layer of the terminal device to report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period, or, according to the second indication period, The physical layer of the terminal device is made to report the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the master of the terminal device node or secondary node.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the terminal device or Secondary node.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  • the receiving unit is configured to receive first information from the master node when the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information; the activation TCI status information for the terminal device to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG;
  • the processing unit is further configured to obtain the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
  • the first information is a first radio resource control RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message
  • the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message
  • the second RRC message is an RRC message from the secondary node.
  • the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • a communication apparatus comprising: a sending unit, configured to send first indication information to a terminal device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period, or to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device; wherein, the first evaluation period is used to instruct the terminal device to, when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state, according to the The first evaluation result is obtained in an evaluation period; the first evaluation result is used to monitor the wireless link or perform the link recovery process on the SCG; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the terminal device according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor to determine the first evaluation period.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device; the second indication information is used to indicate a first indication period or a second scaling factor; wherein the first indication An indication period is used to instruct the terminal device to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to indicate the The terminal device determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • a communication device comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive second information from a secondary node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information, a physical downlink control channel PDCCH for the terminal equipment to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state; a sending unit is configured to send first information to the terminal equipment, the The first information includes the activated TCI status information.
  • the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message
  • the first information is a first RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes the second RRC message
  • the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • a communication device comprising: a sending unit configured to send second information to a master node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information, The physical downlink control channel PDCCH for the terminal equipment to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
  • the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: a processing unit configured to detect beam beam failure of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first The cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG; the processing unit is further configured to initiate a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cell PSCell in the SCG.
  • the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell.
  • the processing unit is further configured to switch from the initial BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell after the random access procedure.
  • the first BWP is the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • the communication apparatus when the first cell is an SCell, the communication apparatus further includes: a sending unit, configured to send a first medium access control element MAC to the secondary node after the random access procedure is successful CE; the first MAC CE, used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: a sending unit configured to send fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the fourth indication information It is used to indicate the beam beam failure of the first cell in the SCG; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a communication apparatus, the communication apparatus comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive a fourth indication message from a master node of the terminal device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate that the secondary cell group SCG The beam beam of the first cell fails.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: at least one processor and an interface circuit, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect and possible designs
  • a sixteenth aspect provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the chip causes the chip to execute the method provided in the first aspect and possible designs, or the second The method provided in the above-mentioned third aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned fourth aspect and possible design, or the above-mentioned fifth aspect and possible design The method provided in the above, or the method provided in the above sixth aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above seventh aspect and possible design.
  • a computer-readable storage medium comprising: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are executed in a communication device or a chip built in the communication device, the communication device is made to execute the above-mentioned first step.
  • the method provided in one aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned second aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned third aspect and possible design, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect and possible design.
  • An eighteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising instructions, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method provided in the above-mentioned first aspect and possible designs, or the method provided in the above second aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above third aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above fourth aspect and possible design, or the above fifth aspect and the method provided in the possible design, or the method provided in the above sixth aspect and the possible design, or the method provided in the above seventh aspect and the possible design.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a network system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an indication period T1 and an evaluation period T2 in a wireless link monitoring provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 3 is one of the schematic flowcharts of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is the second schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a third schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a sixth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a seventh schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is an eighth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is one of schematic structural diagrams of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is the second schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a third schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a fourth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a fifth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a sixth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is a seventh schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is an eighth schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • any embodiments or designs described in the embodiments of the present application as “exemplary” or “such as” should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as “exemplary” or “such as” is intended to present the related concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding.
  • the term “and/or” in this application is only an association relationship to describe associated objects, indicating that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, it can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, There are three cases of B alone.
  • the "plurality" in the embodiments of the present application refers to two or more.
  • the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • a terminal device In a wireless network, a terminal device (also known as user equipment (UE)) may communicate with multiple base stations. This technology is called dual connectivity (DC), also known as multiple air interface dual connectivity. (multi-radio dual connectivity, MR-DC). These multiple base stations that communicate with terminal equipment may be base stations belonging to the same radio access technology (RAT), for example, multiple base stations are the 4th generation mobile communication technology (4G) The base station, or multiple base stations, are the 5th generation mobile communication technology (5G) base stations; in addition, these multiple base stations that communicate with the terminal equipment may also be base stations of different RATs, for example, communicate with the terminal equipment. One of the two base stations that the device communicates with is a 4G base station and the other is a 5G base station.
  • DC the network side can use the resources of multiple base stations to provide communication services for terminal equipment, thereby providing high-speed transmission services to terminal equipment.
  • the base station that has control plane signaling interaction with the core network is called the master node (master node, MN), and other base stations are called secondary nodes (secondary node, SN).
  • master node master node
  • secondary node secondary node
  • the master node and the core network can establish a data plane connection; the secondary base station and the core network can establish a data plane connection.
  • the terminal equipment can receive the services of multiple cells at the same time under one node, and the set of cells that the MN provides services for the terminal equipment can be called the master cell group (MCG); the SN is the cell that provides services for the terminal equipment.
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • Cells in the MCG and SCG jointly provide transmission resources for terminal equipment through carrier aggregation (CA) technology.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • Each cell in the MCG and the SCG may be referred to as a serving cell of the UE.
  • the MCG and the SCG respectively include at least one cell (Cell).
  • PCell refers to a cell deployed at the primary frequency point, and the terminal device initiates the initial connection establishment process, or the terminal device initiates the connection reestablishment process, or is indicated as the PCell cell during the handover process.
  • PSCell primary secondary cell
  • SCG secondary node
  • PSCell refers to the cell in which the terminal device initiates the random access procedure in the secondary node or the cell in which the terminal device initiates data transmission by skipping the random access procedure during the secondary node change process, or the secondary cell in which the random access procedure is initiated during the reconfiguration process for synchronization. Node's cell.
  • PCell and PSCell are collectively referred to as special cell (special cell, SpCell).
  • special cell special cell
  • SCell secondary cell
  • SCell SCell
  • SCell SCell is used to represent cells other than SpCell in MCG and SCG.
  • dual connectivity can be classified into EN-DC, NGEN-DC, NE-DC, NR-DC and other types according to different structures of network deployment. in:
  • the master node is a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) base station eNB that has a control plane connection with the 4G core network EPC, and the secondary node is an NR base station.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • an NR base station in an EN-DC is also called a non-standalone (NSA) NR base station, and a terminal device cannot reside in an NR cell under a non-standalone NR base station.
  • An NR base station capable of resident terminal equipment is called a standalone (standalone, SA) NR base station.
  • the master node is the LTE base station base station ng-eNB that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is the NR base station.
  • the master node is an NR base station that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is an LTE base station.
  • the master node is an NR base station that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is an NR base station.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a dual-connection communication system.
  • the master node 102 has a control plane connection with the core network 101, and the terminal device 104 establishes a wireless connection with the master node 102 and the auxiliary node 103.
  • the master node 102 is also connected to the slave node 103 .
  • the master node 102 and the core network 101 may be connected through an S1 or NG interface.
  • the master node 102 and the core network 101 at least include a control plane connection, and may also have a user plane connection.
  • the interface between the master node 102 and the core network 101 includes S1-U/NG-U and S1-C/NG-C. Among them, S1-U/NG-U represents the user plane connection, and S1-C/NG-C represents the control plane connection.
  • the secondary node 103 and the core network 101 may or may not have a user plane connection.
  • the data of the terminal device 104 can be distributed to the secondary node 103 by the primary node 101 at the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer.
  • the master node 102 may also be called a master base station or a master access network device, and the secondary node 103 may also be called a secondary base station or a slave access network device.
  • the above-mentioned primary node 102 and secondary node 103 may be collectively referred to as network devices.
  • the network devices include but are not limited to: Access points (APs) in wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) systems, such as home gateways, routers, servers, switches, bridges, etc., evolved Node B (evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base station (for example, home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP ), etc., and can also be 5G, such as a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of base stations in a 5G system (including multiple antenna panels)
  • the network device may adopt the CU-DU architecture. That is, the network device may be composed of a CU and at least one DU. In this case, some functions of the network device are deployed on the CU, and another part of the functions of the network device are deployed on the DU.
  • CU and DU are functionally divided according to the protocol stack.
  • the CU is deployed with a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a PDCP layer, and a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer in the protocol stack; DU is deployed with the protocol stack.
  • the CU has the processing capabilities of RRC, PDCP and SDAP.
  • DU has the processing capability of RLC, MAC and PHY. It can be understood that the division of the above functions is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the CU and the DU. That is to say, there may also be other functional division manners between the CU and the DU, which are not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 104 is a device with wireless transceiving function.
  • the terminal device 104 can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); and can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal equipment may be user equipment (user equipment, UE).
  • the UE includes a handheld device, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device or a computing device with a wireless communication function.
  • the UE may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, intelligent Wireless terminals in power grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on.
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the terminal device 104 may be a terminal device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the terminal device 104 is taken as a UE as an example for description.
  • the network side may configure multiple bandwidth parts (BWPs) for the UE, and notify the UE of the currently activated BWP.
  • BWPs bandwidth parts
  • the receiving and transmitting bandwidths of the UE can be changed correspondingly, and the location of the bandwidths can also be changed correspondingly.
  • the BWP used for initial access is called initial BWP (initial BWP).
  • the initial BWP is the first BWP that the network side operates in the corresponding serving cell for the UE.
  • the network side can quickly schedule the UE in order to save power for the UE and subsequent data transmission, and the dormant BWP (dormant BWP) technology is introduced into the SCell.
  • the SCell is still in the active state.
  • the UE does not monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) in the SCell dormant BWP, nor transmit data on the physical downlink shared channel (PUSCH), nor receive the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel). , PDSCH), so as to achieve the purpose of power saving.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PUSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • a beam is a communication resource.
  • the beams can be wide beams, or narrow beams, or other types of beams.
  • the beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technical means.
  • the beamforming technology may be specifically a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, and a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
  • the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
  • multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics may be regarded as one beam.
  • a beam can be formed by one or more antenna ports for the transmission of data channels, control channels and sounding signals, etc.
  • One or more antenna ports forming a beam can be viewed as a set of antenna ports.
  • the antenna port is a logical concept, and one antenna port may correspond to one physical transmit antenna, or may correspond to multiple physical transmit antennas. In both cases, the UE's receiver will not decompose the signal from the same antenna port. Because from the UE's point of view, no matter whether the channel is formed by a single physical transmit antenna or combined by multiple physical transmit antennas, the reference signal (Reference Signal) corresponding to this antenna port defines this antenna port, for example , corresponding to the antenna port of the demodulation reference signal (de-modulation reference signal, DMRS), that is, the DMRS port, and the terminal can obtain the channel estimation of the antenna port according to the reference signal.
  • Each antenna port corresponds to a time/frequency resource grid and has its own reference signal.
  • An antenna port is a channel, and the terminal needs to perform channel estimation and data demodulation according to the reference signal corresponding to the antenna port.
  • Beams include transmit beams and receive beams. Transmitting beams may refer to the distribution of signal strengths formed in different directions in space after signals are transmitted by antennas, and receiving beams may refer to the distribution of antenna arrays that enhance or weaken the reception of wireless signals in different spatial directions.
  • the beam can be represented by the quasi co-location (QCL) relationship of the antenna ports.
  • the two signals of the same beam have a QCL relationship with respect to a spatial reception parameter (spatial Rx parameter), that is, QCL-Type D: ⁇ Spatial Rx parameter ⁇ in the protocol.
  • Beams can be specifically represented by various signal identifiers in the protocol, such as the resource index of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block) , which can be referred to as the SS/PBCH block or SSB for short), the resource index of the sounding reference signal (SRS), and the resource index of the tracking reference signal (TRS).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block
  • SRS resource index of the sounding reference signal
  • TRS resource index of the tracking reference signal
  • a beam corresponds to a DMRS port or a transmission configuration index (TCI for short) or a TRP or a sounding reference signal resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI for short) (used for uplink data transmission), Therefore, different beams can also be represented by different DMRS ports or TCI or TRP or SRI.
  • TCI transmission configuration index
  • SRS resource indicator SRI for short
  • the QCL relationship is used to indicate that multiple resources have one or more same or similar communication characteristics, and for multiple resources with a quasi-co-location relationship, the same or similar communication configuration may be used.
  • the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with the QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port (also referred to as QCL parameters) can be used to determine the parameters of another antenna port with the QCL relationship with the antenna port , or, the two antenna ports have the same parameter, or the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is smaller than a certain threshold.
  • the above parameters may include one or more of the following: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, average gain , the spatial Rx parameters.
  • the spatial reception parameters may include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (AOD), average departure angle AOD, AOD extension , receive antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam, and resource identifiers.
  • AOA angle of arrival
  • AOA extension angle of departure
  • AOD angle of departure
  • AOD extension average departure angle AOD
  • receive antenna spatial correlation parameters receive antenna spatial correlation parameters
  • transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters transmit beam, receive beam, and resource identifiers.
  • TCI Transmission configuration indicator
  • TCI is used to indicate QCL information of PDCCH or PDSCH.
  • the TCI can be used to indicate which reference signal the DMRS of the PDCCH or PDSCH and which satisfies the QCL relationship, and then the UE can determine the reference signal according to the TCI, and receive the PDCCH/PDSCH with the same or similar spatial parameters as the reference signal.
  • the TCI state for receiving the PDCCH can be understood as the TCI state for receiving the PDCCH.
  • the network side may indicate one or more control resource sets (CORESET) in the PDCCH configuration of each downlink (downlink, DL) BWP of the UE, and some of the protocols stipulate that the network side has a maximum of each control resource set (CORESET).
  • CORESET control resource set
  • Each BWP of each cell is configured with 3 CORESETs.
  • one or more TCI states (states) for receiving PDCCH may be configured for the UE, and the one or more TCI states for receiving PDCCH may be referred to as candidate TCI states.
  • the TCI state may indicate the QCL type between the DMRS of the PDCCH and one or more reference signals.
  • the network side may indicate the search space (search space) of each DL BWP of the UE in the PDCCH configuration of the BWP, wherein it is stipulated in some protocols that the network side configures a maximum of 10 searches for each BWP of each cell space.
  • search space is associated with a CORESET. Then the UE monitors the PDCCH according to these CORESETs and the corresponding search space configuration.
  • the UE can determine the DMRS information of the monitored PDCCH according to the activated TCI state. . Then the PDCCH can be monitored according to the corresponding search space configuration.
  • Medium Access Control Element MAC CE
  • the search space defines how and where the UE searches for PDCCH (The IE SearchSpace defines how/where to search for PDCCH candidates), and each search space is associated with a CORESET.
  • the UE suspends the SCG, which can be understood as the UE suspends signaling transmission and/or data transmission through the communication link of the SCG, but the terminal retains or stores part or all of the configuration of the SCG .
  • Suspending the SCG means that the UE temporarily stops using the SCG for data transmission, but retains the configuration of the SCG. Specifically, when the UE does not need to use the SCG to provide services for itself or the UE does not need to use the SCG link, for example, when the data rate of the UE is low, the UE can suspend the SCG according to the instruction of the network side, such as retaining the configuration of the SCG, And data transmission is not performed through the SCG; when the SCG needs to be used to provide services for itself or the SCG link needs to be used, for example, when the data rate of the UE becomes high, the UE can restore (restore/resume) the SCG according to the instructions of the network side. configuration, and data transfer via SCG.
  • a suspended SCG may also be referred to as the SCG is in a suspended state, or the SCG is in an idle/inactive state, or the UE is in a dormancy or inactive state or a deactivated state in the SCG Wait.
  • Restoring SCG can be called restore SCG or resume SCG.
  • the resumed SCG or the SCG when it is not suspended may also be referred to as the SCG being in a busy/active (active) state, or the UE is in a busy or active state or an active state in the SCG, or the like.
  • suspend SCG can be implemented in the following ways:
  • Scheme 1 adopt the method of making the UE dormant in PSCell and SCell. For example, suspend SCG is implemented by making UE enter dormant BWP in PSCell and SCell. In this way, the UE does not need to monitor the PDCCH/PDSCH in the PSCell and the SCell, nor does it need to send the PUSCH.
  • Scheme 2 The UE adopts a long discontinuous reception (long discontinuous reception, long DRX) method in the SCG. In this way, the UE may not send and receive data in the SCG for a long time, thereby saving power.
  • long discontinuous reception long DRX
  • the UE may not perform the random access procedure in the suspended SCG, that is, not perform the SCG RACH.
  • the UE will detect the downlink signal quality of PCell and PSCell, and indicate synchronization or desynchronization to the upper layer in each indication period.
  • the UE usually only monitors the downlink signal quality of the activated downlink BWP of the PCell and PSCell.
  • the RLM process can include:
  • the network side configures a reference signal (reference signal, RS) set for RLM for each BWP of the primary cell and the primary and secondary cells of the UE (these RSs may be referred to as RLM explicit RSs) .
  • the reference signals in the reference signal set may be CSI-RS or SSB.
  • the UE can perform radio link monitoring according to the reference signals in the above reference signal set.
  • NRLM can be determined by the maximum number of SSBs Lmax of the corresponding cell, for example, the corresponding relationship between NRLM and Lmax can be determined according to Table 1 below:
  • the network side does not configure the above reference signal set for the UE, but the network side configures the UE with a TCI state for receiving PDCCH.
  • Each of these TCI states includes one or more CSI-RSs, and the RSs included in the TCI states may be called implicit RSs of the RLM.
  • the network side will notify to change the active TCI state of the received PDCCH. Furthermore, the UE may determine the reference signal included in the activated TCI state according to the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH. The UE can then perform radio link monitoring based on these reference signals. in:
  • the UE uses the reference signal to perform RLM;
  • the UE performs RLM using the reference signal set to QCL-TypeD. (The network side will not set the two reference signals as QCL-TypeD for the UE).
  • the UE usually does not use aperiodic or semi-static reference signals for radio link monitoring.
  • the UE can perform radio link monitoring according to NRLM reference signals at most.
  • the NRLM may be determined by the maximum number of SSBs Lmax of the corresponding cell, for example, the corresponding relationship between the NRLM and Lmax may be determined according to the above Table 1.
  • the UE selects N RLM RSs for RLM from the corresponding active TCI states of the received PDCCH in the CORESETs associated with the search space set.
  • the UE may be selected according to the period of the RS from low to high. If the RSs corresponding to multiple CORESETs have the same period, the UE selects from the index of the CORESET arriving from the smallest.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the corresponding cell once in each indication period, and obtains the evaluation result.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
  • one evaluation period may be selected from the plurality of evaluation periods to evaluate the link signal quality in the evaluation period.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the closest evaluation period before the indication period ends, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
  • the indication period of the RLM is T1
  • the evaluation period is T2.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell once every time interval T1, that is , the physical layer of the UE as shown in FIG. link signal quality.
  • the rectangular box in FIG. 2 shows the time corresponding to each evaluation period when the evaluation period is T2.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell at time t 1 , t 2 , t 3 , . That is, as shown in Figure 2, at time t 1 , the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal obtained in the evaluation period N 1 , and obtains the evaluation result; at time t 2 , the physical layer of the UE is For the reference signal acquired in the evaluation period N2 , the link signal quality of the cell is evaluated to obtain the evaluation result; at time t3 , the physical layer of the UE is the reference signal acquired in the evaluation period N3, and the link of the cell is evaluated. Evaluate the signal quality of the channel to obtain the evaluation result... and so on, at time t n , the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell based on the reference signal obtained in the evaluation period N n , and obtains the evaluation result.
  • the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and 10ms is used as the indication period.
  • the second is that when the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and the DRX period is used as the indication period. Or, in the case where the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, when the DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms, the maximum value of the shortest cycle of 10ms, 1.5 ⁇ DRX cycle and 1.5 ⁇ RLM resources is used as the indication cycle, when the DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms When it is greater than 320ms, the DRX cycle is used as the indication cycle.
  • the size of the evaluation period used to evaluate the link signal quality in the RLM is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, and the DRX configured by the UE in the cell under test.
  • Period the type of reference signal used for evaluation (SSB or CSI-RS), the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located (FR1 or FR2), and the type of indication sent to the upper-layer protocol stack corresponding to the indication period (synchronization indication or out-of-synch) indication), and other parameters related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following four situations:
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_SSB of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_SSB of the out-of-synchronization indication can be determined according to the following table 2 to determine:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_SSB of the synchronization instruction and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_SSB of the out-of-synchronization instruction can be determined according to the following table. 3 to determine:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_CSI- RS can be determined according to Table 4 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the CSI-RS transmission moment.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_CSI- RS can be determined according to Table 5 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the CSI-RS transmission moment.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal acquired in the previous evaluation period to obtain an evaluation result.
  • the UE compares the link signal quality in an evaluation period with Qout (Qout is used to define the corresponding link signal quality when the downlink radio link cannot be reliably received.
  • Qout may correspond to an out-of-sync block error rate (in- sync block error rate, BLERin) level) and Qin (Qin is used to define the link signal quality when the downlink wireless link can be reliably received with a higher reliability than Qout.
  • Qin can correspond to a The synchronization block error rate (out-of-sync block error rate, BLERout) level) is compared, and then the evaluation result is obtained.
  • the physical layer of the UE After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the physical layer of the UE sends indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, including: the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the upper protocol stack may be the RRC layer.
  • the physical layer of the UE when the link signal quality corresponding to all RSs of the RLM is worse than Qout, the physical layer of the UE sends an out-of-synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the link signal quality corresponding to any RS of the RLM is better than Qin, the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the RLM further includes: S14.
  • the RRC layer of the UE receives N310 consecutive out-of-synchronization indications from the physical layer, the UE starts a timer T310. After the timer is started, the UE performs link signal quality monitoring using the evaluation period and the indication period corresponding to the assumption that DRX is not currently configured until T310 times out or stops.
  • the UE is in DC, if both the MN and the SN are NR base stations, the UE performs the link recovery process in each serving cell in the MCG or SCG respectively. During the link recovery process, the UE detects the downlink signal quality of each serving cell in the MCG or SCG, and when a beam failure occurs in one of the serving cells, the UE performs corresponding operations to re-access the serving cell.
  • the network side will configure a CSI-RS resource set for the UE It is used for link signal quality assessment during the link recovery process (the CSI-RS in these CSI-RS resource sets are all periodic). Include up to two RSs.
  • the UE uses the periodic CSI-RS in the active TCI state used to receive the PDCCH in the BWP as the CSI-RS resource set
  • the RS with QCL-TypeD is used as the RS in .
  • a maximum of two RSs are included, and these RSs are single-port RSs.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the corresponding cell once in each indication period.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period. For example, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the closest evaluation period before the indication period ends, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
  • the size of the indication period used to evaluate the link signal quality in the link recovery process is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX.
  • the parameters such as the shortest period corresponding to each reference signal and the size of the DRX period configured by the UE in the current cell under test are related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following two cases (refer to Chapter 8.5.4 of 3GPP TS 38.133 for description):
  • the cycle is the DRX cycle; if the DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the cycle is max(1.5 ⁇ DRX cycle length, The shortest period of SSB in ), namely (1.5 ⁇ DRX period length) and (
  • the cycle is max (1.5 ⁇ DRX cycle length, The shortest period of csi-rs in ).
  • the size of the evaluation period used to evaluate the link signal quality is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, and whether the UE is currently under test.
  • Parameters such as the DRX cycle configured by the cell, the type of reference signal (SSB or CSI-RS) used for evaluation, and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located are related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following four situations:
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_SSB can be determined according to Table 6 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_SSB can be determined according to Table 7 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the value of N is 8.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS can be determined according to Table 8 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the value of N is 1.
  • the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS can be determined according to Table 9 below:
  • the value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
  • the value of N is 1.
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal acquired in the previous evaluation period to obtain an evaluation result.
  • the link signal quality in one evaluation period of the UE and the threshold Q out, LR (the threshold Q out, LR defines the corresponding link signal quality when the downlink signal quality cannot be reliably received.
  • Q out may correspond to Assuming that the transmission parameters of the PDCCH are the corresponding transmission bit error rate levels of 10% under the transmission parameters specified in the protocol), the evaluation results are obtained.
  • the physical layer of the UE After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, including: the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information of the failure of the beam to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the upper protocol stack may be the MAC layer.
  • the physical layer of the UE uses If all RSs in the evaluation link signal quality are worse than the thresholds Q out,LR , the physical layer of the UE sends a beam failure indication message to the upper layer.
  • the MAC layer of the UE When the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information of a beam failure of a serving cell from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a timer, and record the number of times of the currently received beam failure indication information plus 1. If before the timer expires, when the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams in the serving cell fail, if the serving cell is PCell or PSCell, the UE initiates a random access procedure in this cell; if the serving cell is PCell or PSCell, the UE initiates a random access procedure; If the cell is an SCell, the UE triggers a beam failure recovery (BFR) process of the SCell. If the timer expires, the MAC layer of the UE will set the number of times of beam failure indication information currently received to 0.
  • BFR beam failure recovery
  • the UE triggers the BFR process of the SCell, including:
  • the MAC layer of the UE will generate a BFR MAC CE of the SCell and send the BFR MAC CE to the network. side (if it is the SCell of the master node, it will be sent to the master node; if it is the SCell of the slave node, it will be sent to the slave node);
  • the MAC layer of the UE will generate a shortened BFR MAC CE and send the shortened BFR MAC CE to the network side (If it is the SCell of the primary node, it will be sent to the primary node; if it is the SCell of the secondary node, it will be sent to the secondary node);
  • a scheduling request is triggered for SCell beam failure recovery, and then the UE sends a BFR MAC CE to (if it is the SCell of the primary node, it is sent to the primary node; if it is the SCell of the secondary node, it is sent to the secondary node).
  • the contents carried in the BFR MAC CE mainly include: 1) serving cell index: used to indicate which serving cell detects beam failure; 2) candidate beam identifier whose signal quality is higher than or equal to a threshold Q out,LR .
  • the UE will evaluate the type of reference signal (SSB or SS) according to whether DRX is configured in the current cell under test, the DRX cycle configured by the UE in the cell under test, and the type of reference signal used.
  • CSI-RS and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located, to determine the evaluation period for evaluating the link signal quality. That is to say, regardless of whether the UE suspends the SCG or resumes the SCG, the same method will be used to determine the evaluation period. This results in that the evaluation period adopted by the UE during the radio link monitoring process does not match the current state of the UE.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the terminal device included in the communication system is an UE as an example for description.
  • the method includes:
  • the UE obtains a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period.
  • the SCG is in a deactivated state, which may refer to a state in which the configuration of the SCG is suspended, and the UE does not transmit data through the SCG. From the perspective of the UE, the SCG is in a deactivated state, and it can also be considered that the UE is in a deactivated state in the SCG.
  • the UE When the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE will suspend (or retain) the configuration of the SCG but not completely release the configuration of the SCG, so that when the UE needs to transmit data through the SCG, it can use the suspended (or reserved) SCG
  • the configuration restores the SCG to return the SCG to the active state.
  • the first evaluation period specifically refers to the time length corresponding to the link signal quality reflected by each evaluation result when evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state.
  • T2 when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, when evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG, each time a link within a time period of T2 is evaluated. The signal quality of the channel is evaluated, and the evaluation result is obtained.
  • the UE acquires a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period.
  • the second evaluation period specifically refers to when the SCG of the UE is in the active state, when the link signal quality of the SCG is evaluated, the link signal quality reflected by each evaluation result corresponds to length of time.
  • the UE in the case of evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG, for example, when the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG, or performs a link recovery process on the SCG, the UE may be in the SCG state. In different states (deactivated state or activated state), the evaluation period corresponding to the current state is used to obtain the evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG. By setting the evaluation period corresponding to different SCG states, the power consumption of the terminal device and the accuracy of the evaluation result can be taken into account, so that the wireless link monitoring or link recovery process can be performed more flexibly.
  • the UE may determine whether to execute S101 or S102 according to the current state (ie, the deactivated state or the activated state) of the SCG of the UE, and then according to the evaluation period corresponding to the current state (ie, the first evaluation period or the second evaluation period) to obtain the evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG.
  • the current state ie, the deactivated state or the activated state
  • the evaluation period corresponding to the current state
  • the evaluation result (that is, the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result) of the link signal quality of the SCG is obtained according to the evaluation period (that is, the first evaluation period or the second evaluation period), and the content of this content is
  • the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in an evaluation period before each indication period and obtains the corresponding evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
  • Description, or can refer to the above description of the link recovery process in S22 in each indication period the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period and obtains the corresponding description of the indication period corresponding to the evaluation result , and will not be repeated here.
  • the UE can obtain the evaluation result of the signal quality of the SCG link according to the evaluation period corresponding to the current state of the SCG. Therefore, in some specific scenarios, for example, when the shortest period of the RLM resource is a specific value, or the DRX period is a specific value, the first evaluation period corresponding to the SCG in the deactivated state is the same as the second evaluation period in which the SCG is in the active state. may be equal in length. However, in the specific implementation manner of the method provided by the present application, there are at least some scenarios. When the SCG is in the deactivated state and the SCG is in the activated state, the lengths of the corresponding first evaluation period and the second evaluation period are not equal.
  • the network device can instruct the SCG of the UE to enter the deactivated state through various existing technologies, or instruct the SCG of the UE to recover from the deactivated state to the activated state.
  • the network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE, which may not be limited in this application.
  • the UE performs radio link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.
  • the method provided in this embodiment when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the scenario of performing RLM on the SCG, if the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG according to the first evaluation result; if the SCG is in the activated state , the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG according to the second evaluation result.
  • the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the scenario of performing the link recovery process on the SCG, if the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE performs the link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result; In the active state, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the second evaluation result.
  • the wireless link monitoring or the link recovery process is performed on the SCG.
  • the physical layer of the UE After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period in S13, the physical layer of the UE sends a corresponding description of the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, or you can refer to the above-mentioned introduction to the link recovery process.
  • the physical layer of the UE After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends a corresponding description of the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, which will not be repeated here.
  • the method provided in this embodiment further includes:
  • the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack; when the SCG is in the activated state, then According to the second indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the UE when the SCG is in different states (deactivated state or activated state), the UE can move the physical layer of the UE to the upper layer according to the indication period (the first indication period or the second indication period) corresponding to the current state.
  • the protocol stack reports the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result.
  • the SCG when the SCG is in a deactivated state, it corresponds to a longer indication period; when the SCG is in an activated state, it corresponds to a shorter indication period.
  • the energy consumption of the UE when the SCG is in the deactivated state can be lower than the energy consumption when the SCG is in the activated state.
  • the UE may report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the indication period corresponding to the current state of the SCG. Therefore, in some specific scenarios, for example, when the DRX cycle is a specific value, the length of the first indication period corresponding to the SCG in the deactivated state may be equal to the length of the second indication period when the SCG is in the activated state. However, in the specific implementation manner of the method provided in this application, there are at least some scenarios where the lengths of the corresponding first indication period and the second indication period are unequal when the SCG is in the deactivated state and the SCG is in the activated state.
  • the upper-layer protocol stack when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the radio link monitoring, the upper-layer protocol stack may specifically be the RRC layer.
  • the upper-layer protocol stack when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the link recovery process, the upper-layer protocol stack may specifically be the MAC layer.
  • the first indication period may be understood as a period in which the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the second indication period may be understood as a period in which the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the UE when the SCG of the UE is in the deactivated state, the UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, and After obtaining the first evaluation result in each first indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the RRC layer.
  • the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result may include: a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication.
  • the physical layer of the UE sends an out-of-synchronization indication to the RRC layer.
  • the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the UE when the SCG of the UE is in the active state, the UE obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous second evaluation cycle in each second indication cycle, and obtains the first evaluation result in each second indication cycle. After the second evaluation result, the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the RRC layer.
  • the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result may include: a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication.
  • the UE when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, and After obtaining the first evaluation result in each first indication period, if the first evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses The signal quality of all RS evaluation links in is worse than the threshold Q out,LR , and the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result (that is, the indication information of beam failure) to the MAC layer.
  • the UE obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous second evaluation cycle in each second indication cycle, and obtains the first evaluation result in each second indication cycle.
  • the second evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses The signal quality of all RSs in the evaluation link is worse than the threshold Q out,LR , then the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result (that is, the indication information of beam failure) to the MAC layer.
  • the UE may determine the second evaluation period according to the manner of determining the evaluation period during the radio link monitoring or link recovery process described in S12 or S22 above.
  • the above-mentioned first evaluation period may be obtained from indication information from a network device.
  • the following Figures 4 and 5 describe two specific implementations respectively:
  • Implementation mode 1 As shown in FIG. 4 , the above method in this embodiment may further include:
  • the UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period.
  • the network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE. That is to say, the first indication information may be sent by the master node to the UE, or may be sent by the secondary node to the UE, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device may send the first indication information to the UE through various technologies.
  • the network device can send the first indication information to the UE by any one of the manners in which the network device sends a MAC CE or RRC message or an L1 indication message to the UE.
  • the first evaluation period may be notified to the UE by the network device.
  • This implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the UE from consuming unnecessary power, and is especially suitable for the scenario where the SCG is in a deactivated state and no DRX is configured for the SCG. , the problem of high power consumption caused by the UE using an evaluation period not corresponding to DRX to evaluate the link signal quality can be avoided.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device may also be achieved.
  • Implementation mode 2 As shown in FIG. 5 , the above method in this embodiment may further include:
  • S106 The UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the first scaling factor.
  • the network device may send the first indication information to the UE through various technologies.
  • the UE determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the third evaluation cycle may be an evaluation cycle adopted in the prior art.
  • the third evaluation period can be any one of Tables 2-9.
  • the UE is configured according to whether the UE has DRX in the current cell under test, the DRX period configured by the UE in the cell under test, and the type of reference signal used for evaluation.
  • the evaluation period is determined by parameters such as (SSB or CSI-RS) and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located.
  • the third evaluation period is an evaluation period determined by the UE according to the table in Table 2-9 according to the UE not configuring DRX in the currently detected cell or according to the UE using a specific DRX period in the currently detected cell.
  • the size of the third evaluation period may not be limited.
  • the UE may determine the first evaluation period according to the first scaling factor from the network device, according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor (eg, according to the first scaling factor, for the third The evaluation period is scaled to obtain the first evaluation period).
  • this implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the UE from consuming unnecessary power, especially when the SCG is in a deactivated state and is not used for the SCG
  • the problem of high power consumption caused by the UE using a non-DRX-corresponding evaluation period to evaluate the link signal quality can be avoided.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the above-mentioned first indication period may be acquired by the UE according to a predetermined rule.
  • the first evaluation period may be an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  • the first evaluation period may be an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period in any of Tables 2-9.
  • the predetermined DRX cycle may be the maximum DRX cycle (eg, 10240 ms) in the current protocol.
  • the predetermined DRX cycle may be a DRX cycle greater than 320 ms.
  • the first indication period described in S104 may be obtained from indication information from a network device, and the following two specific implementation manners are respectively described in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 .
  • Implementation mode 1 As shown in Figure 6, the method further includes:
  • S108 The UE receives the second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period.
  • the network device is the primary node or secondary node of the UE.
  • the UE may determine the first indication period according to the second indication information. Then, according to the first indication period, the UE's physical layer can report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the first indication period may be notified to the UE by the network device.
  • this implementation can prevent the indication period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR, DRX period size, etc. Avoid unnecessary power consumption by the UE.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device may also be achieved.
  • Implementation Mode 2 As shown in Figure 7, the method further includes:
  • S109 The UE receives the second indication information from the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the second scaling factor.
  • the network device is the primary node or secondary node of the UE;
  • the UE determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • the third indication period may be an indication period adopted in the prior art.
  • the third indication period may be, in the prior art, whether the UE has DRX configured in the current cell under test, the DRX period configured by the UE in the current cell under test, the RLM or the period of the reference signal used in the link recovery process and other parameters to determine the indication period.
  • the third indication period is an indication period determined by the UE according to that the UE is not configured with DRX in the currently detected cell or according to the UE using a certain specific DRX period in the currently detected cell.
  • the size of the third indication period may not be limited.
  • the UE may determine the first indication period according to the second scaling factor from the network device, according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor (for example, scaling the third indication period according to the second scaling factor) , and then obtain the first indication period).
  • this implementation can prevent the indication period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR, DRX period size, etc. Avoid unnecessary power consumption by the UE.
  • the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
  • the first indication period may be an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  • the indication period corresponding to the predetermined DRX period may be an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period in the manner of determining the indication period adopted in the above S12 or S22.
  • the first indication period may be the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and the predetermined DRX period.
  • the first indication cycle when the predetermined DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms, the first indication cycle may be the shortest cycle of 10ms, 1.5 ⁇ predetermined DRX cycle, and 1.5 ⁇ RLM resources. The maximum value of , when the predetermined DRX cycle is greater than 320ms, the predetermined DRX cycle is used as the first indication cycle.
  • the first indication cycle may be the predetermined DRX cycle ; If the predetermined DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the first indication cycle is max(1.5 ⁇ predetermined DRX cycle, The shortest period of SSB in ), namely (1.5 ⁇ predetermined DRX period) and (
  • the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the link recovery process, for using CSI-RS to evaluate link signal quality, if the predetermined DRX cycle length exceeds 320ms, the first indication cycle is the predetermined DRX cycle; if the predetermined DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the cycle is max(1.5 ⁇ predetermined DRX cycle, The shortest period of csi-rs in ).
  • the value of the predetermined DRX cycle may be determined according to actual needs.
  • the predetermined DRX cycle may be a large DRX cycle (eg, 10240ms) in the current protocol.
  • the predetermined DRX cycle may be a DRX cycle greater than 320 ms. This application may not limit the value of the predetermined DRX cycle.
  • the content of S101-S103 may not be executed before executing S107 in the communication method provided by the present application. That is to say, in some scenarios, in the above methods of the embodiments of the present application, the technical means described in S107-S110 may be implemented independently without using the methods provided in S101-S103, so as to achieve corresponding technical effects.
  • the UE may need to determine the reference signal for the RLM or link recovery process according to the active TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG.
  • the active TCI state of the received PDCCH is usually transmitted through the MAC CE carried on the PDSCH channel.
  • the UE may not be able to receive the PDSCH of the secondary node. As a result, the UE cannot obtain the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus cannot perform the RLM or link recovery process on the SCG.
  • the method provided in this embodiment may further include:
  • the secondary node of the UE sends the second information to the primary node.
  • the second information includes activated TCI state information.
  • the above activated TCI state information is used for the UE to receive the PDCCH of the SCG.
  • the above-mentioned activated TCI status information is used to indicate the activated TCI status of the receiving PDCCH of the SCG.
  • the secondary node can obtain a reference signal (such as CSI-RS) that meets the conditions through the SRS from the UE, and then adjust the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, so as to use the TCI state corresponding to the above-mentioned reference signal that meets the conditions as the activation TCI status. That is, the secondary node determines that the activated TCI state information included in the second information is used to indicate the TCI state corresponding to the reference signal that satisfies the condition.
  • CSI-RS such as CSI-RS
  • the UE may send the measurement result of the reference signal monitored by the UE in the SCG to the secondary node through the master node, and the secondary node may determine the content of the second information according to the measurement result of the reference signal monitored by the UE in the SCG.
  • the master node sends the first information to the UE.
  • the first information includes the above-mentioned activated TCI state information.
  • the UE obtains an evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
  • the secondary node when the SCG of the UE is in the deactivated state, the secondary node can first send the activated TCI status information to the master node, and then the master node can send the activated TCI status information to the UE. , to send the active TCI status information to the UE. In this way, it can be avoided that the UE cannot obtain the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus cannot perform the RLM or link recovery process on the SCG.
  • the above S113 or the above S101 may specifically include:
  • the UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
  • the UE may perform a radio link monitoring or link recovery process on the SCG with reference to the corresponding description of the above S103.
  • the UE may not select different evaluation periods according to the different states of the SCG (deactivated state or activated state) to evaluate the link signal quality of the SCG (ie, S101-S103). , and use other methods to perform RLM measurement or radio link recovery.
  • the methods provided in S111-S113 can also be implemented independently to achieve corresponding technical effects, which are not limited in this application.
  • the first information may be a first RRC message
  • the second information may be a second RRC message.
  • the first RRC message includes the second RRC message
  • the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message.
  • the activated TCI state information may be carried in an RRC message (referred to as a second RRC message) by the secondary node and sent to the primary node.
  • the DU of the secondary node can send the activated TCI status information to the CU of the secondary node, and then the CU of the secondary node generates an RRC message (ie, the second RRC message), and then sends the second RRC message to the CU of the secondary node.
  • the RRC message is sent to the master node.
  • the second information may be carried in an interface message (for example, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node modification request acknowledge, s-node modification required) sent by the secondary base station to the master node.
  • the master node then encapsulates the second RRC message into an RRC message (referred to as the first RRC message) in such a way that it is sent to the UE, so as to send the active TCI status information to the UE.
  • the second RRC message is generated by the secondary node.
  • the first RRC message is generated by the master node.
  • the first information may be an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
  • the second information may be sent to the master node in a manner that the master node can perceive.
  • the second information may be an interface message (for example, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node) sent from the secondary base station to the master node. modification request acknowledge and s-node modification required) are carried in the explicit way of cells.
  • the secondary node can send the second information to the primary node in a way that the primary node can perceive, for example, by sending an interface message, so that the primary node can parse the second information and obtain The activated TCI state information carried in the second information.
  • the DU of the secondary node can send the active TCI status to the CU of the secondary node, and then the CU of the secondary node generates an interface message, and then sends the second information to the primary node.
  • the master node can carry the activated TCI state information in the RRC message or the MAC CE (that is, the first information) and send it to the UE, To realize that the master node sends the active TCI status information to the UE.
  • the master node is a CU/DU architecture
  • the master node after the master node obtains the activated TCI state information by parsing the interface message, the CU of the master node sends the activated TCI state information to the DU of the master node, and then the DU of the master node generates a MAC CE, And send the generated MAC CE to the UE.
  • the first information may further include third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the above-mentioned activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE
  • the first information contains The above-mentioned third indication information is also included.
  • the UE when the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail (that is, indicating that the beams of the PSCell have failed), the UE will trigger a random connection on the PSCell.
  • the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the SCell in the secondary node fail (that is, indicating that the beam of the SCell fails)
  • the UE sends the BFR MAC CE to the secondary node.
  • the method of how the UE initiates the random access procedure to the SCG has not yet been determined, which results in the UE not being able to initiate the random access procedure in the SCG, and thus unable to complete the pairing process.
  • the link recovery process of PSCell in addition, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE may not send uplink data to the SCG, that is, the BFR MAC CE cannot be sent.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used in the case where the SCG is in a deactivated state, and when the beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the UE can perform a random access procedure in the PSCell, or the UE can perform a random access procedure in the PSCell.
  • a BFR MAC CE can be sent to the secondary node to complete the link recovery process to PSCell or SCell.
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • the UE fails to detect the beam of the first cell in the SCG.
  • the SCG is in a deactivated state, and the first cell is a PSCell or an SCell in the SCG.
  • the beam failure of the first cell in the SCG may refer to: when the MAC layer of the UE receives a beam failure indication information of the first cell of an SCG from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a beam failure. Timer, and record the number of beam failure indication information currently received plus 1. If the MAC layer of the UE receives a certain number of beam failure indication information of the first cell before the timer expires, it is considered that the beam of the first cell in the SCG has failed.
  • the UE initiates a random access procedure at the first BWP of the PSCell in the SCG.
  • the first cell is a PSCell
  • the UE detects that the beam of the PSCell fails the BWP of the PSCell in the SCG initiates a random access procedure.
  • the successful completion of the link recovery process to the PSCell is ensured.
  • the UE When the first cell is an SCell, when the UE detects that the beam of the SCell fails, the BWP of the PSCell in the SCG initiates a random access procedure. In this way, the UE can send uplink data to the SCG through the PSCell, that is, send the BFR MAC CE, thereby ensuring the successful completion of the link recovery process to the SCell.
  • the method when the first cell is an SCell, the method further includes:
  • the UE After the random access procedure initiated by the first BWP is successful, the UE sends the first MAC CE to the secondary node.
  • the first MAC CE is used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
  • the first BWP may be the initial BWP of the PSCell.
  • the above method further includes:
  • the UE switches from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • the link recovery process for the PSCell is completed, and then the PSCell can be switched from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • Restoring to the deactivated state saves the power of the UE, and at the same time reduces the network side re-sending the command to enter the deactivated state to the UE, and also reduces the overhead.
  • the UE when the first cell is an SCell, as described in S202 above, after the UE initiates the random access procedure in the first BWP, the UE can send a BFR MAC CE to the SCG through the PSCell to complete the link recovery process for the SCell. Then switch from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell, so that the PSCell can be restored to the deactivated state, so as to save the power of the UE, and at the same time, the network side re-sends the command to the UE to enter the dormant BWP, and the overhead is also reduced.
  • the first BWP may be the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 9 may be applied to the method shown in FIG. 3 to solve the problem in the method shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the technical problem solved by the method shown in FIG. 9 realizes the technical effect achieved by the method shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the UE when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE first obtains the first evaluation result of the contact signal instruction of the SCG according to the first evaluation period. Then, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result.
  • the link recovery process if the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the first cell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
  • the physical layer of the UE reports the beam failure indication information to the MAC layer.
  • the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
  • the UE can initiate a random access procedure through the first BWP of the PSCell in the SCG, thereby ensuring that the link recovery procedure to the first cell can be successfully completed.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used in the case where the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, when a beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the link recovery process for the PSCell or the SCell is completed.
  • the method includes the following steps:
  • the UE sends fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate beam failure of the first cell in the SCG.
  • the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UE to prepare to perform the beam recovery process in the first cell.
  • the first cell may be a PSCell or an SCell in the SCG.
  • indicating the beam failure of the first cell in the SCG refers to: when the MAC layer of the UE receives a beam failure indication information of the first cell of the SCG from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a beam failure. Timer, and record the number of beam failure indication information currently received plus 1. If the MAC layer of the UE receives a certain number of beam failure indication information of the first cell before the timer expires, it is considered that the beam of the first cell in the SCG has failed.
  • the fourth indication information may also carry an index of a candidate beam whose signal quality measured by the UE in the SCell is better than a certain threshold.
  • the secondary node receives the fourth indication message from the primary node.
  • the UE sends the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node, so that the secondary node can be notified of the beam failure of the first cell (PSCell or SCell) on the premise that the UE does not send uplink data to the secondary node.
  • the communication method shown in FIG. 10 may be applied to the method shown in FIG. 3 to solve the problem in the method shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the technical problem solved by the method shown in FIG. 10 realizes the technical effect achieved by the method shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the UE when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE first obtains the first evaluation result of the contact signal instruction of the SCG according to the first evaluation period. Then, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result.
  • the link recovery process if the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the first cell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
  • the physical layer of the UE reports the beam failure indication information to the MAC layer.
  • the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
  • the UE can send the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node, and then can notify the secondary node of the first cell (PSCell or SCell) on the premise that the UE does not send uplink data to the secondary node. ) beam fails.
  • the UE and/or the network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples. In the embodiments of the present application, other operations or various operations may also be performed. Variation of an operation. In addition, various steps may be performed in different orders presented in the embodiments of the present application, and may not be required to perform all the operations in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiments provided in this application may be related to each other, and may be referred to or referenced to each other.
  • the above embodiments mainly introduce the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of interaction between devices.
  • the above-mentioned UE or the master node or the auxiliary node includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function.
  • the unit of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in hardware or in the form of a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the device including the UE or the master node or the auxiliary node
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated. in a processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules.
  • the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and another division manner may be used in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 11 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication apparatus 40 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 40 may be a chip or a system on a chip in the UE.
  • the communication apparatus 40 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 40 includes:
  • a processing unit 401 configured to obtain a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period when the SCG of the secondary cell group of the UE is in a deactivated state;
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to obtain a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period when the SCG is in an active state;
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to perform wireless link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.
  • the communication device 40 further includes:
  • the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the UE.
  • the communication device 40 further includes:
  • a receiving unit 402 configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the UE;
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to make the physical layer of the UE report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period, or, according to the second indication period, causing the physical layer of the UE to report the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  • the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the master of the UE node or secondary node.
  • the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the UE or Secondary node.
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  • the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  • the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive first information from a master node when the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information; the Activate TCI status information for the UE to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG;
  • the processing unit 401 is further configured to obtain the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
  • the first information is a first RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message
  • the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes a second RRC message.
  • the second RRC message is the RRC message from the secondary node.
  • the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • FIG. 12 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 50 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 50 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a network device (eg, a master node or a slave node of a UE).
  • the communication apparatus 50 may be used to perform the functions of the network equipment involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 50 includes:
  • a sending unit 501 is configured to send first indication information to a UE; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period or a first scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the UE or A secondary node; wherein the first evaluation period is used to instruct the UE to obtain a first evaluation result according to the first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the first evaluation result is used for Perform radio link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the UE to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  • the sending unit 501 is further configured to send second indication information to the UE; the second indication information is used to indicate a first indication period or a second scaling factor; wherein the first indication An indication period is used to instruct the UE to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to instruct the UE to report the first evaluation result to the upper layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; The third indication period and the second scaling factor determine the first indication period.
  • FIG. 13 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 60 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 60 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the master node.
  • the communication device 60 may be used to perform the functions of the master node involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 60 includes:
  • a receiving unit 601 configured to receive second information from a secondary node, where the second information includes activated transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used by the UE to receive the secondary cell group of the secondary node The physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state;
  • a sending unit 602 configured to send first information to the UE, where the first information includes the activated TCI state information.
  • the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message
  • the first information is a first RRC message
  • the first RRC message includes the second RRC message
  • the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
  • the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  • FIG. 14 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 70 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 70 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the secondary node.
  • the communication apparatus 70 may be used to perform the functions of the secondary node involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 70 includes:
  • the sending unit 701 is configured to send second information to the master node, where the second information includes TCI status information of an active transmission configuration indication; the active TCI status information is used for the UE to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node The physical downlink control channel PDCCH; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
  • the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
  • FIG. 15 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 80 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 80 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the UE.
  • the communication apparatus 80 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 80 includes:
  • a processing unit 801 configured to detect beam beam failure of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG;
  • the processing unit 801 is further configured to initiate a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cells PSCell in the SCG.
  • the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell.
  • the processing unit 801 is further configured to switch from the initial BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell after the random access process.
  • the first BWP is the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  • the communication apparatus 80 when the first cell is an SCell, the communication apparatus 80 further includes:
  • the sending unit 802 is configured to send a first medium access control control element MAC CE to the secondary node after the random access process is successful; the first MAC CE is used to indicate that the beam of the first cell fails.
  • FIG. 16 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 90 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 90 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the UE.
  • the communication apparatus 90 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 90 includes:
  • the sending unit 901 is configured to send fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG fails ; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • FIG. 17 it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 100 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the secondary node of the UE.
  • the communication apparatus 100 may be used to perform the functions of the secondary node involved in the above embodiments.
  • the communication device 100 includes:
  • the receiving unit 1001 is configured to receive a fourth indication message from the master node of the UE, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate beam beam failure of the first cell in the secondary cell group SCG.
  • the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic composition diagram of a communication device 110 .
  • the communication device 110 includes: at least one processor 1101 and at least one interface circuit 1104 .
  • the communication device 110 may further include a communication line 1102 and a memory 1103.
  • the processor 1101 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 1102 may include a path to communicate information between the components described above.
  • Interface circuit 1104 using any transceiver-like device, for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc. .
  • RAN radio access network
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • Memory 1103 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other types of information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, CD-ROM storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or capable of carrying or storing program code in the form of instructions or data structures and capable of being accessed by a computer any other medium, but not limited to.
  • the memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through communication line 1102 . The memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the memory 1103 is used for storing computer-executed instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1101 .
  • the processor 1101 is configured to execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1103, thereby implementing the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to execute S101-S104 shown in FIG. 3 , FIGS. 6-7 , and S105 shown in FIG. 4 . , S106 and S107 shown in FIG. 5 , S108 shown in FIG. 6 , S109 and S110 shown in FIG. 7 , S112 and S113 shown in FIG. 8 , and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to execute S105 shown in FIG. 4, S106 shown in FIG. 5, S108 shown in FIG. 6, and S108 shown in FIG. 7. S109 shown, and other operations that the network device needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S111 and S112 as shown in FIG. 8, as well as other operations that the master node needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S111 as shown in FIG. 8, and other operations that the secondary node needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S201-S204 as shown in FIG. 9, and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S301 as shown in FIG. 10, and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
  • the communication device 110 when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S302 as shown in FIG. 10, and other operations that the secondary node needs to perform.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as application code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 1101 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 18 .
  • the apparatus 1100 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 1101 and the processor 1107 in FIG. 18 .
  • processors can be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing, eg, computer data (computer program instructions).
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include an output device 1105 and an input device 1106 .
  • the output device 1105 is in communication with the processor 1101 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 1105 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait.
  • the input device 1106 is in communication with the processor 1101 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 1106 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where an instruction is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the instruction is executed, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is executed.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product including instructions. When it runs on a computer, the computer can execute the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a chip.
  • the chip includes a processor.
  • the processor executes the computer program instructions
  • the chip can execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the instruction can come from memory inside the chip or from memory outside the chip.
  • the chip also includes an input and output circuit as a communication interface.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a communication system, including a first node and a second node.
  • the first node is configured to perform operations that need to be performed by the master node of the UE in the foregoing embodiments of the present application
  • the second node is configured to perform operations that need to be performed by the secondary node of the UE in the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
  • the first node is configured to execute S111-S112 in FIG. 8, receive the second information from the second node and send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the second node is configured to execute S111 in FIG. 8 and send the second information to the first node.
  • the functions or actions or operations or steps in the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • a software program When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or data storage devices including one or more servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the medium.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)
  • Transceivers (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a communication method and apparatus, which relate to the technical field of communications. The method is used for reducing the power consumption of a terminal device. The method comprises: when a secondary cell group (SCG) of a terminal device is in a deactivated state, the terminal device acquiring, according to a first evaluation period, a first evaluation result for link signal quality of the SCG; when the SCG is in an activated state, the terminal device acquiring, according to a second evaluation period, a second evaluation result for link signal quality of the SCG; and the terminal device performing a wireless link monitoring or link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.

Description

通信方法及装置Communication method and device 技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
在现有技术中,在双连接(dual-connectivity,DC)技术的应用中,当终端设备无需使用辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)为自身提供通信服务时,可暂时挂起(suspended)SCG,如,将SCG的配置挂起,并且不通过SCG进行数据传输,从而降低终端设备以及网络设备的能耗。另外,在终端设备需要使用SCG为自身提供通信服务时,则终端设备可恢复(restore)SCG的配置,还可通过SCG进行数据传输,以满足终端设备对数据传输速率的需求。In the prior art, in the application of dual-connectivity (DC) technology, when a terminal device does not need to use a secondary cell group (SCG) to provide communication services for itself, it can be temporarily suspended (suspended) The SCG, for example, suspends the configuration of the SCG and does not transmit data through the SCG, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and the network device. In addition, when the terminal device needs to use the SCG to provide communication services for itself, the terminal device can restore (restore) the configuration of the SCG, and can also perform data transmission through the SCG to meet the terminal device's demand for data transmission rate.
但即便是在终端设备挂起SCG的条件下,由于终端设备可能进行信号质量检测等操作,依然可能存在不必要的高能耗。However, even under the condition that the terminal device suspends the SCG, because the terminal device may perform operations such as signal quality detection, there may still be unnecessary high energy consumption.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用于降低终端设备的耗电量。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus for reducing power consumption of a terminal device.
为了达到以上目的,本申请实施例提供一下技术方案:In order to achieve the above purpose, the embodiments of the present application provide the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:当终端设备的辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,所述终端设备根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果;当所述SCG处于激活状态时,所述终端设备根据第二评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果;所述终端设备根据所述第一评估结果或第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: when a secondary cell group SCG of a terminal device is in a deactivated state, the terminal device obtains a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period ; When the SCG is in an active state, the terminal device obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period; the terminal device obtains, according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result, Perform radio link monitoring or link recovery procedures on the SCG.
本实施例中,终端设备采用分别对应于挂起SCG的情况下和恢复SCG的情况的评估周期,来对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估,通过设置对应于不同SCG状态的评估周期,能够兼顾终端设备的功耗与评估结果的准确性,从而更灵活地进行无线链路监测或链路恢复过程。例如,在挂起SCG的情况下,可以采用更长的评估周期;在恢复了SCG的情况下,可以采用更短的评估周期,可以使终端设备在挂起SCG状态下的能耗低于非挂起SCG状态下的能耗。In this embodiment, the terminal device evaluates the link signal quality of the SCG by using evaluation periods corresponding to the case of suspending the SCG and the case of resuming the SCG respectively. By setting the evaluation periods corresponding to different SCG states, it is possible to take into account the The power consumption of the terminal equipment and the accuracy of the evaluation results, so that the wireless link monitoring or link recovery process can be performed more flexibly. For example, in the case of suspending the SCG, a longer evaluation period can be used; in the case of resuming the SCG, a shorter evaluation period can be used, so that the energy consumption of the terminal device in the suspended SCG state is lower than that of the non-SCG state. Power consumption in suspended SCG state.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一评估周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。In a possible design, the method further includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is the The primary or secondary node of the end device.
在上述设计中,第一评估周期可以是网络设备通知给终端设备的。这样一来,相比终端设备利用现有技术中确定评估周期的方式来确定第一评估周期,本实现方式可以避免评估周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本设计中,由于第一评估周期可以是网络设备通知给终端设备的,因此还可以实现由网络设备控制第一评估周期的大小的效果。In the above design, the first evaluation period may be notified by the network device to the terminal device. In this way, compared with the method in which the terminal device determines the evaluation period in the prior art to determine the first evaluation period, the present implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power. In addition, in this design, since the first evaluation period may be notified by the network device to the terminal device, the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指 示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。所述终端设备根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子,确定所述第一评估周期。In a possible design, the method further includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is the terminal device primary or secondary node. The terminal device determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
在上述设计中,终端设备可以根据来自网络设备的第一缩放因子,根据第三评估周期和第一缩放因子来确定第一评估周期(例如,根据第一缩放因子,对第三评估周期进行缩放,进而得到第一评估周期)。这样一来,相比终端设备利用现有技术中确定评估周期的方式来确定第一评估周期,本实现方式可以避免评估周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本设计中,还可以实现由网络设备控制第一评估周期的大小的效果。In the above design, the terminal device may determine the first evaluation period according to the first scaling factor from the network device, according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor (for example, scaling the third evaluation period according to the first scaling factor) , and then obtain the first evaluation period). In this way, compared with the method in which the terminal device determines the evaluation period in the prior art to determine the first evaluation period, the present implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power. In addition, in this design, the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一评估周期是预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的评估周期。In a possible design, the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
在上述设计中,通过使预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的评估周期作为第一评估周期,从而可以避免评估周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。In the above design, by making the evaluation period corresponding to the predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period as the first evaluation period, the size of the evaluation period can be prevented from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the terminal The device consumes unnecessary power.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:根据第一指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果对应的指示信息;或者,根据第二指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第二评估结果对应的指示信息。In a possible design, the method further includes: according to the first indication period, the physical layer of the terminal device reports indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack; or, according to the second indication period, The physical layer of the terminal device reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
在上述设计中,可以根据终端设备的SCG的当前状态(即去激活状态或者激活状态),选择不同的指示周期,来向上层协议栈上报指示信息。具体的,当SCG处于去激活状态时,选择第一指示周期向上层协议栈上报指示信息;当SCG处于激活状态时,选择第二指示周期向上层协议栈上报指示信息。例如,在挂起SCG的情况下,采用更长的指示周期;在恢复了SCG的情况下,采用更短的指示周期。这样一来,便可以使终端设备在挂起SCG状态下的能耗低于非挂起SCG状态下的能耗。在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一指示周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。In the above design, different indication periods can be selected according to the current state of the SCG of the terminal device (ie, the deactivated state or the activated state) to report indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack. Specifically, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, the first indication period is selected to report the indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack; when the SCG is in the activated state, the second indication period is selected to report the indication information to the upper-layer protocol stack. For example, when the SCG is suspended, a longer indication period is used; when the SCG is resumed, a shorter indication period is used. In this way, the power consumption of the terminal device in the suspended SCG state can be lower than that in the non-suspended SCG state. In a possible design, the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the The primary or secondary node of the end device.
在上述设计中,第一指示周期可以是网络设备通知给终端设备的。这样一来,相比终端设备利用现有技术中确定指示周期的方式来确定第一指示周期,本实现方式可以避免指示周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本设计中,由于第一指示周期可以是网络设备通知给终端设备的,因此还可以实现由网络设备控制第一指示周期的大小的效果。In the above design, the first indication period may be notified by the network device to the terminal device. In this way, compared with the way that the terminal device determines the first indication period in the prior art, this implementation can avoid the influence of the size of the indication period by whether the measured cell is configured with parameters such as DXR and DRX period size. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power. In addition, in this design, since the first indication period may be notified to the terminal device by the network device, the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示第二缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;所述终端设备根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。In a possible design, the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the terminal device The primary node or secondary node; the terminal device determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
在上述设计中,终端设备可以根据来自网络设备的第二缩放因子,根据第三指示周期和第二缩放因子来确定第一指示周期(例如,根据第二缩放因子,对第三指示周期进行缩放,进而得到第一指示周期)。这样一来,相比终端设备利用现有技术中确定指示周期的方式来确定第一指示周期,本实现方式可以避免指示周期的大小受到被 测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本设计中,还可以实现由网络设备控制第一指示周期的大小的效果。In the above design, the terminal device may determine the first indication period according to the second scaling factor from the network device, according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor (for example, scaling the third indication period according to the second scaling factor) , and then obtain the first indication period). In this way, compared with the way that the terminal device determines the first indication period in the prior art, this implementation can avoid the influence of the size of the indication period by whether the measured cell is configured with parameters such as DXR and DRX period size. This prevents the terminal device from consuming unnecessary power. In addition, in this design, the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示周期是预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。In a possible design, the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
在上述设计中,通过使预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的指示周期作为第一指示周期,从而可以避免指示周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免终端设备消耗不必要的电量。In the above design, by making the indication period corresponding to the predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period as the first indication period, the size of the indication period can be prevented from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the terminal The device consumes unnecessary power.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:当所述SCG处于去激活状态时,所述终端设备接收来自主节点的第一信息;所述第一信息包括:激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH。所述终端设备根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果,包括:所述终端设备基于所述激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,根据第一评估周期获取对所述SCG的链路信号质量的所述第一评估结果。In a possible design, the method further includes: when the SCG is in a deactivated state, the terminal device receives first information from the master node; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information ; the activated TCI state information is used by the terminal equipment to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG. Obtaining, by the terminal device, a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period includes: the terminal device, based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information, obtains, according to the first evaluation period, the link signal quality of the SCG. The first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG.
上述设计中,在终端设备的SCG处于去激活状态时,可以通过由主节点将激活TCI状态信息发送至终端设备的这种方式,来将激活TCI状态信息发送至终端设备。这样一来,终端设备便可以根据激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估,避免终端设备无法获取SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,进而无法对SCG进行RLM或链路恢复过程的问题。In the above design, when the SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state, the active TCI state information can be sent to the terminal device by the master node sending the active TCI state information to the terminal device. In this way, the terminal device can evaluate the link signal quality of the SCG according to the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI status information, so as to prevent the terminal device from being unable to obtain the activated TCI status of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus unable to perform RLM or linking on the SCG. Problems with the road restoration process.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,所述激活TCI状态信息包括在所述第二RRC消息中;所述第二RRC消息是来自辅节点的RRC消息。In a possible design, the first information is a first radio resource control RRC message, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message, and the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message; The second RRC message is an RRC message from the secondary node.
上述设计中,在终端设备的SCG处于去激活状态时,可以通过辅节点向主节点发送第二RRC消息,主节点再向终端设备发送包括第二RRC消息的第一RRC消息,从而将激活TCI状态信息发送至终端设备。并且,在上述设计中,由于主节点不需要对第二RRC消息进行解析,因此可以在不占用主节点过多资源的前提下,实现将激活TCI状态信息从辅节点发送至终端设备的效果。In the above design, when the SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state, the secondary node can send the second RRC message to the master node, and the master node sends the first RRC message including the second RRC message to the terminal device, thereby activating the TCI. Status information is sent to the end device. Moreover, in the above design, since the master node does not need to parse the second RRC message, the effect of sending the activated TCI state information from the slave node to the terminal device can be achieved without occupying too many resources of the master node.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE.
上述设计中,主节点可以通过发送RRC消息或MAC CE的方式,将激活TCI状态信息发送至终端设备。In the above design, the master node can send the activated TCI status information to the terminal device by sending an RRC message or a MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
上述设计中,通过在第一信息中增加第三指示信息,从而使终端设备能够知道第一信息中所包括的激活TCI状态信息是MCG的TCI状态信息还是SCG的TCI状态信息。In the above design, by adding third indication information to the first information, the terminal device can know whether the activated TCI state information included in the first information is the TCI state information of the MCG or the TCI state information of the SCG.
第二方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息,用于指示第一评估周期,或者用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。其中,所述第一评估周期,用于指示所述终端设备在辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据所述第一评估周期获取第一评估结果;所述第一评估结果用于对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程;所述第一缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子确定所 述第一评估周期。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: a network device sending first indication information to a terminal device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period or a first scaling factor; The network device is the primary node or the secondary node of the terminal device. Wherein, the first evaluation period is used to instruct the terminal device to obtain a first evaluation result according to the first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the first evaluation result is used to evaluate the SCG Perform wireless link monitoring or perform a link recovery process; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息,用于指示第一指示周期或第二缩放因子;其中,所述第一指示周期,用于指示所述终端设备根据所述第一指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果;所述第二缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。In a possible design, the method further includes: the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period or the second scaling factor; wherein, The first indication period is used to instruct the terminal device to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to The terminal device is instructed to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
第三方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:主节点接收来自辅节点的第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;所述主节点向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括所述激活TCI状态信息。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, the method includes: a master node receives second information from a secondary node, the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used for the The terminal equipment receives the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the primary node sends first information to the terminal equipment, the first information includes all The active TCI status information is described above.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息为第二无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一信息为第一RRC消息;所述第一RRC消息包括所述第二RRC消息。In a possible design, the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message, and the first information is a first RRC message; the first RRC message includes the second RRC message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
第四方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:辅节点向主节点发送第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: a secondary node sending second information to a master node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used for the terminal The device receives the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息是所述辅节点发给所述主节点的RRC消息,或所述第二信息是所述辅节点与所述主节点之间的接口消息。In a possible design, the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
其中,第二方面至第四方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可以参见上述第一方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the technical effect brought by any one of the design methods in the second aspect to the fourth aspect, reference may be made to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the above-mentioned first aspect, which will not be repeated here.
第五方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:终端设备检测辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell;所述终端设备在所述SCG中的主辅小区PSCell的第一部分带宽BWP发起随机接入过程。In a fifth aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: a terminal device fails to detect a beam beam of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first cell is the SCG The PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG; the terminal device initiates a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cell PSCell in the SCG.
在上述方法中,在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,当检测到PSCell或SCell的beam失败时,通过终端设备在PSCell进行随机接入过程,以便对PSCell或SCell的链路恢复过程可以顺利完成。In the above method, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, when the beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the terminal device performs the random access procedure in the PSCell, so that the link recovery process to the PSCell or the SCell can be successfully completed. .
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的初始BWP;所述方法还包括:所述终端设备在所述随机接入过程后,从所述第一BWP切换至所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。In a possible design, the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell; the method further includes: the terminal device, after the random access procedure, switches from the first BWP to the PSCell's dormant dormant BWP.
在上述设计中,通过从第一BWP切换至PSCell的休眠dormant BWP,便可以使PSCell恢复到去激活状态,以节省终端设备的电量,同时减少了网络侧重新给终端设备发送进入去激活状态的命令,也减少了开销。In the above design, by switching from the first BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell, the PSCell can be restored to the deactivated state, so as to save the power of the terminal device, and at the same time reduce the network side re-send the terminal device to enter the deactivated state. command, also reduces overhead.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的dormant BWP。In one possible design, the first BWP is the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
在上述设计中,在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,当检测到PSCell或SCell的 beam失败时,终端设备可以在PSCell的dormant BWP发起随机接入过程,以便对PSCell或SCell的链路恢复过程可以顺利完成。In the above design, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, when the beam failure of the PSCell or SCell is detected, the terminal device can initiate a random access procedure in the dormant BWP of the PSCell to restore the link of the PSCell or SCell. can be successfully completed.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一小区为SCell时,所述方法还包括:在所述随机接入过程成功后,所述终端设备向辅节点发送第一介质访问控制控制元素MAC CE;所述第一MAC CE,用于指示所述第一小区的beam失败。In a possible design, when the first cell is an SCell, the method further includes: after the random access procedure is successful, the terminal device sends a first medium access control element MAC to the secondary node CE; the first MAC CE, used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
在上述设计中,在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,当检测到SCell(即第一小区)的beam失败时,通过在第一小区发起随机接入过程,并在所述随机接入过程成功后,所述终端设备向辅节点发送第一介质访问控制控制元素MAC CE,从而使对第一小区的链路恢复过程可以顺利完成。In the above design, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, when the beam failure of the SCell (ie the first cell) is detected, the random access procedure is initiated in the first cell, and the random access procedure succeeds Then, the terminal device sends the first medium access control element MAC CE to the secondary node, so that the link recovery process to the first cell can be successfully completed.
第六方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:当SCG处于去激活状态时,终端设备通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息;所述第四指示信息用于指示所述SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell。In a sixth aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: when the SCG is in a deactivated state, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node; the fourth indication information is used to indicate the SCG in the SCG The beam beam of the first cell fails; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
上述方法中,当SCG处于去激活状态时,通过终端设备通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息的方式,可以将SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败的情况向辅节点告知。避免因为SCG处于去激活状态,而导致终端设备无法向辅节点告知第一小区的波束beam失败的这一问题。In the above method, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, the terminal device can notify the secondary node of the failure of the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG by sending the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node. This avoids the problem that the terminal equipment cannot notify the secondary node of the beam beam failure of the first cell because the SCG is in a deactivated state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
在上述设计中,终端设备可以通过主节点向辅节点发送RRC消息或MAC CE的方式,将SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败的情况向辅节点告知。In the above design, the terminal device can notify the secondary node of the failure of the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG by sending an RRC message or a MAC CE from the primary node to the secondary node.
第七方面,提供一种通信方法,该方法包括:终端设备的辅节点接收来自所述终端设备的主节点的第四指示消息,所述第四指示信息用于指示辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败。In a seventh aspect, a communication method is provided, the method comprising: a secondary node of a terminal device receiving a fourth indication message from a master node of the terminal device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate the first indication message in the secondary cell group SCG Beam beam failure for a cell.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
其中,第七方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可以参见上述第六方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。Wherein, for the technical effect brought by any one of the design methods in the seventh aspect, reference may be made to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the above-mentioned sixth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
第八方面,提供一种通信装置。该通信装置包括:处理单元,用于当终端设备的辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果;处理单元,还用于当所述SCG处于激活状态时,根据第二评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果;处理单元,还用于据所述第一评估结果或第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device includes: a processing unit, configured to obtain a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state; When the SCG is in the active state, obtain a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period; the processing unit is further configured to perform wireless radio on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result. Link monitoring or performing link recovery procedures.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括:接收单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一评估周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。In a possible design, the communication apparatus further includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is The primary node or secondary node of the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置还包括:接收单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;处理单元,还根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子,确定所述第一评估周期。In a possible design, the communication apparatus further includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is the The master node or the slave node of the terminal device; the processing unit further determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一评估周期是预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的评估周期。In a possible design, the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,还根据第一指示周期,使所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果对应的指示信息,或者,根据第二指示周期,使所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第二评估结果对应的指示信息。In a possible design, the processing unit further enables the physical layer of the terminal device to report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period, or, according to the second indication period, The physical layer of the terminal device is made to report the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一指示周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。In a possible design, the receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the master of the terminal device node or secondary node.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示第二缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。处理单元,还用于根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。In a possible design, the receiving unit is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the terminal device or Secondary node. The processing unit is further configured to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示周期是预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。In a possible design, the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元,用于当所述SCG处于去激活状态时,接收来自主节点的第一信息;所述第一信息包括:激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;In a possible design, the receiving unit is configured to receive first information from the master node when the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information; the activation TCI status information for the terminal device to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG;
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元,还用于基于所述激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,根据第一评估周期获取对所述SCG的链路信号质量的所述第一评估结果。In a possible design, the processing unit is further configured to obtain the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,所述激活TCI状态信息包括在所述第二RRC消息中;所述第二RRC消息是来自辅节点的RRC消息。In a possible design, the first information is a first radio resource control RRC message, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message, and the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message; The second RRC message is an RRC message from the secondary node.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
第九方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:发送单元,用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息,用于指示第一评估周期,或者用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;其中,所述第一评估周期,用于指示所述终端设备在辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据所述第一评估周期获取第一评估结果;所述第一评估结果用于对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程;所述第一缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子确定所述第一评估周期。In a ninth aspect, a communication apparatus is provided, the communication apparatus comprising: a sending unit, configured to send first indication information to a terminal device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period, or to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device; wherein, the first evaluation period is used to instruct the terminal device to, when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state, according to the The first evaluation result is obtained in an evaluation period; the first evaluation result is used to monitor the wireless link or perform the link recovery process on the SCG; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the terminal device according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor to determine the first evaluation period.
在一种可能的设计中,发送单元,还用于向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息,用于指示第一指示周期或第二缩放因子;其中,所述第一指示周期,用于指示所述终端设备根据所述第一指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果;所述第二缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。In a possible design, the sending unit is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device; the second indication information is used to indicate a first indication period or a second scaling factor; wherein the first indication An indication period is used to instruct the terminal device to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to indicate the The terminal device determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
第十方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:接收单元,用于接收来自辅节点的第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;发送单元,用于向所述终端设备发送第 一信息,所述第一信息包括所述激活TCI状态信息。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided, the communication device comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive second information from a secondary node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information, a physical downlink control channel PDCCH for the terminal equipment to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state; a sending unit is configured to send first information to the terminal equipment, the The first information includes the activated TCI status information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息为第二无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一信息为第一RRC消息;所述第一RRC消息包括所述第二RRC消息。In a possible design, the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message, and the first information is a first RRC message; the first RRC message includes the second RRC message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
第十一方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:发送单元,用于向主节点发送第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态。In an eleventh aspect, a communication device is provided, the communication device comprising: a sending unit configured to send second information to a master node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information, The physical downlink control channel PDCCH for the terminal equipment to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息是所述辅节点发给所述主节点的RRC消息,或所述第二信息是所述辅节点与所述主节点之间的接口消息。In a possible design, the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
第十二方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理单元,用于检测辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell;处理单元,还用于在所述SCG中的主辅小区PSCell的第一部分带宽BWP发起随机接入过程。A twelfth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: a processing unit configured to detect beam beam failure of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first The cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG; the processing unit is further configured to initiate a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cell PSCell in the SCG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的初始BWP。处理单元,还用于在所述随机接入过程后,从所述初始BWP切换至所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。In one possible design, the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell. The processing unit is further configured to switch from the initial BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell after the random access procedure.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。In one possible design, the first BWP is the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一小区为SCell时,通信装置还包括:发送单元,用于在所述随机接入过程成功后,向辅节点发送第一介质访问控制控制元素MAC CE;所述第一MAC CE,用于指示所述第一小区的beam失败。In a possible design, when the first cell is an SCell, the communication apparatus further includes: a sending unit, configured to send a first medium access control element MAC to the secondary node after the random access procedure is successful CE; the first MAC CE, used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
第十三方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:发送单元,用于当辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息;所述第四指示信息用于指示所述SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell。A thirteenth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: a sending unit configured to send fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the fourth indication information It is used to indicate the beam beam failure of the first cell in the SCG; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
第十四方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:接收单元,用于接收来自所述终端设备的主节点的第四指示消息,所述第四指示信息用于指示辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败。A fourteenth aspect provides a communication apparatus, the communication apparatus comprising: a receiving unit configured to receive a fourth indication message from a master node of the terminal device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate that the secondary cell group SCG The beam beam of the first cell fails.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
第十五方面,提供一种通信装置,所述通信装置包括:至少一个处理器和接口电路,当所述处理器执行计算机程序指令时,使得所述通信装置执行上述第一方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第二方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第三方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第四方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第五方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第六方面及可能 的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第七方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法。A fifteenth aspect provides a communication device, the communication device comprising: at least one processor and an interface circuit, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the communication device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect and possible designs The method provided in the above, or the method provided in the second aspect and possible design above, or the method provided in the third aspect and possible design above, or the method provided in the fourth aspect and possible design above , or the method provided in the above fifth aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above sixth aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above seventh aspect and possible design.
第十六方面,提供一种芯片,该芯片包括处理器,当所述处理器执行计算机程序指令时,使得所述芯片执行上述第一方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第二方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第三方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第四方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第五方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第六方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第七方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法。A sixteenth aspect provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the chip causes the chip to execute the method provided in the first aspect and possible designs, or the second The method provided in the above-mentioned third aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned fourth aspect and possible design, or the above-mentioned fifth aspect and possible design The method provided in the above, or the method provided in the above sixth aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above seventh aspect and possible design.
第十七方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括:计算机软件指令;当所述计算机软件指令在通信装置或内置在所述通信装置的芯片中运行时,使得所述通信装置执行上述第一方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第二方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第三方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第四方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第五方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第六方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第七方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, comprising: computer software instructions; when the computer software instructions are executed in a communication device or a chip built in the communication device, the communication device is made to execute the above-mentioned first step. The method provided in one aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned second aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned third aspect and possible design, or the above-mentioned fourth aspect and possible design The method provided in the design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned fifth aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above-mentioned sixth aspect and possible design, or the above-mentioned seventh aspect and possible design. method.
第十八方面,提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括指令,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第二方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第三方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第四方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第五方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第六方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法,或者上述第七方面及可能的设计中所提供的方法。An eighteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising instructions, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method provided in the above-mentioned first aspect and possible designs, or the method provided in the above second aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above third aspect and possible design, or the method provided in the above fourth aspect and possible design, or the above fifth aspect and the method provided in the possible design, or the method provided in the above sixth aspect and the possible design, or the method provided in the above seventh aspect and the possible design.
上述第八方面至第十八方面中任一种设计方法所带来的技术效果可以参见上述第一方面至第七方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。For the technical effects brought by any one of the design methods in the eighth aspect to the eighteenth aspect, reference may be made to the technical effects brought by the different design methods in the first aspect to the seventh aspect, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种网络系统的结构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of a network system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种无线链路监测中指示周期T1和评估周期T2的示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of an indication period T1 and an evaluation period T2 in a wireless link monitoring provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之一;3 is one of the schematic flowcharts of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之二;FIG. 4 is the second schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之三;FIG. 5 is a third schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之四;FIG. 6 is a fourth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之五;FIG. 7 is a fifth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之六;FIG. 8 is a sixth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之七;FIG. 9 is a seventh schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图之八;FIG. 10 is an eighth schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之一;FIG. 11 is one of schematic structural diagrams of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之二;FIG. 12 is the second schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之三;FIG. 13 is a third schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之四;FIG. 14 is a fourth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之五;FIG. 15 is a fifth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之六;FIG. 16 is a sixth schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之七;FIG. 17 is a seventh schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图之八。FIG. 18 is an eighth schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时,在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。本申请中的术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。本申请实施例中出现的“多个”是指两个或两个以上。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Among them, in order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same or similar items with basically the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that the words "first", "second" and the like do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words "first", "second" and the like are not necessarily different. Meanwhile, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to represent examples, illustrations or illustrations. Any embodiments or designs described in the embodiments of the present application as "exemplary" or "such as" should not be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as "exemplary" or "such as" is intended to present the related concepts in a specific manner to facilitate understanding. The term "and/or" in this application is only an association relationship to describe associated objects, indicating that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, it can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, There are three cases of B alone. The "plurality" in the embodiments of the present application refers to two or more.
另外,本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。In addition, the network architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute limitations on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. With the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
以下对本申请涉及的相关技术进行介绍:The related technologies involved in this application are introduced as follows:
1、双连接技术1. Dual connection technology
在无线网络中一个终端设备(也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE))可能与多个基站通信,这种技术称为双连接(dual connectivity,DC),也被称为多空口双连接(multi-radio dual connectivity,MR-DC)。这些与终端设备进行通信的多个基站可能是属于同一无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的基站,例如多个基站都是第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation mobile communication technology,4G)基站,或者多个基站都是第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation mobile communication technology,5G)基站;另外,这些与终端设备进行通信的多个基站也可能是不同RAT的基站,例如,与终端设备进行通信的两个基站中一个是4G基站,一个是5G基站。在DC中,网络侧可以利用多个基站的资源为终端设备提供通信服务,从而向终端设备提供高速率传输服务。In a wireless network, a terminal device (also known as user equipment (UE)) may communicate with multiple base stations. This technology is called dual connectivity (DC), also known as multiple air interface dual connectivity. (multi-radio dual connectivity, MR-DC). These multiple base stations that communicate with terminal equipment may be base stations belonging to the same radio access technology (RAT), for example, multiple base stations are the 4th generation mobile communication technology (4G) The base station, or multiple base stations, are the 5th generation mobile communication technology (5G) base stations; in addition, these multiple base stations that communicate with the terminal equipment may also be base stations of different RATs, for example, communicate with the terminal equipment. One of the two base stations that the device communicates with is a 4G base station and the other is a 5G base station. In DC, the network side can use the resources of multiple base stations to provide communication services for terminal equipment, thereby providing high-speed transmission services to terminal equipment.
在DC中,与终端设备进行通信的多个基站中,与核心网有控制面信令交互的基站称为主节点(master node,MN),其他基站称为辅节点(secondary node,SN)。除了控制面信令交互,主节点与核心网可以建立数据面连接;辅基站与核心网可以建立数据面连接。In DC, among multiple base stations that communicate with terminal equipment, the base station that has control plane signaling interaction with the core network is called the master node (master node, MN), and other base stations are called secondary nodes (secondary node, SN). In addition to the control plane signaling interaction, the master node and the core network can establish a data plane connection; the secondary base station and the core network can establish a data plane connection.
其中,终端设备在一个节点下可以同时接受多个小区的服务,MN为终端设备提供服务的小区的集合,可以称为主小区组(master cell group,MCG);SN为终端设备提供服务的小区的集合,可以称为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。MCG和SCG中的小区通过载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)技术,共同为终端设备提供 传输资源。MCG和SCG中的各小区均可以称为UE的服务小区。其中,MCG和SCG中分别包含至少一个小区(Cell)。Among them, the terminal equipment can receive the services of multiple cells at the same time under one node, and the set of cells that the MN provides services for the terminal equipment can be called the master cell group (MCG); the SN is the cell that provides services for the terminal equipment. A set of , which can be called a secondary cell group (SCG). Cells in the MCG and SCG jointly provide transmission resources for terminal equipment through carrier aggregation (CA) technology. Each cell in the MCG and the SCG may be referred to as a serving cell of the UE. The MCG and the SCG respectively include at least one cell (Cell).
在终端设备的MCG中存在一个主小区(primary cell,PCell)。PCell指部署在主频点,且终端设备发起初始连接建立过程,或者终端设备发起连接重建过程,或者在切换过程中被指示为PCell的小区。There is a primary cell (PCell) in the MCG of the terminal device. PCell refers to a cell deployed at the primary frequency point, and the terminal device initiates the initial connection establishment process, or the terminal device initiates the connection reestablishment process, or is indicated as the PCell cell during the handover process.
在终端设备的SCG中存在一个主辅小区(primary secondary cell,PSCell)。PSCell指终端设备在辅节点发起随机接入过程的小区或者当终端设备在辅节点改变过程中跳过随机接入过程发起数据传输的小区,或者执行同步的重配过程中发起随机接入的辅节点的小区。There is a primary secondary cell (primary secondary cell, PSCell) in the SCG of the terminal equipment. PSCell refers to the cell in which the terminal device initiates the random access procedure in the secondary node or the cell in which the terminal device initiates data transmission by skipping the random access procedure during the secondary node change process, or the secondary cell in which the random access procedure is initiated during the reconfiguration process for synchronization. Node's cell.
在一些协议中,例如新空口(new radio,NR)中,将PCell和PSCell统称为特别小区(special cell,SpCell)。当MCG或SCG中有多个小区时,除了SpCell之外的小区,可以称之为辅小区(secondary cell,SCell)。在另一些协议中,则将MCG和SCG中除PCell外的小区,均称为SCell。本申请中,若没有特殊说明,则SCell用于表示MCG和SCG中除了SpCell之外的小区。In some protocols, such as new radio (NR), PCell and PSCell are collectively referred to as special cell (special cell, SpCell). When there are multiple cells in the MCG or SCG, the cells other than the SpCell may be called secondary cells (secondary cell, SCell). In other protocols, the cells in the MCG and the SCG other than the PCell are called SCells. In this application, unless otherwise specified, SCell is used to represent cells other than SpCell in MCG and SCG.
在目前的应用中,按照网络部署的不同结构,双连接可以分为EN-DC,NGEN-DC,NE-DC,NR-DC等种类。其中:In current applications, dual connectivity can be classified into EN-DC, NGEN-DC, NE-DC, NR-DC and other types according to different structures of network deployment. in:
EN-DC中主节点为与4G核心网EPC有控制面连接的长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)基站eNB,辅节点为NR基站。在一些场景中,EN-DC中的NR基站也被称为非独立组网(non standalone,NSA)NR基站,终端设备不能驻留在非独立组网的NR基站下的NR小区。能驻留终端设备的NR基站,称之为独立组网(standalone,SA)NR基站。In the EN-DC, the master node is a Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) base station eNB that has a control plane connection with the 4G core network EPC, and the secondary node is an NR base station. In some scenarios, an NR base station in an EN-DC is also called a non-standalone (NSA) NR base station, and a terminal device cannot reside in an NR cell under a non-standalone NR base station. An NR base station capable of resident terminal equipment is called a standalone (standalone, SA) NR base station.
NGEN-DC中主节点为与5G核心网5GC有控制面连接的LTE基站基站ng-eNB,辅节点为NR基站。In NGEN-DC, the master node is the LTE base station base station ng-eNB that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is the NR base station.
NE-DC中主节点为与5G核心网5GC有控制面连接的NR基站,辅节点为LTE基站。In the NE-DC, the master node is an NR base station that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is an LTE base station.
NR-DC中主节点为与5G核心网5GC有控制面连接的NR基站,辅节点为NR基站。In NR-DC, the master node is an NR base station that has a control plane connection with the 5G core network 5GC, and the secondary node is an NR base station.
示例性的,图1为一种双连接的通信系统的结构示意图。其中,主节点102与核心网101有控制面连接,终端设备104与主节点102、辅节点103均建立无线连接。另外,主节点102还与辅节点103连接。Exemplarily, FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a dual-connection communication system. The master node 102 has a control plane connection with the core network 101, and the terminal device 104 establishes a wireless connection with the master node 102 and the auxiliary node 103. In addition, the master node 102 is also connected to the slave node 103 .
主节点102与核心网101之间可以通过S1或NG接口连接。主节点102与核心网101之间至少包括控制面连接,还可以有用户面连接。主节点102与核心网101之间接口包括S1-U/NG-U和S1-C/NG-C。其中,S1-U/NG-U代表用户面连接,S1-C/NG-C代表控制面连接。辅节点103与核心网101之间可以具有用户面连接,也可以不具有用户面连接。当辅节点103与核心网101之间不具有用户面连接时,终端设备104的数据可以由主节点101在分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层分流给辅节点103。该主节点102又可被称为主基站或主接入网设备,辅节点103又可被称为辅基站或辅接入网设备。The master node 102 and the core network 101 may be connected through an S1 or NG interface. The master node 102 and the core network 101 at least include a control plane connection, and may also have a user plane connection. The interface between the master node 102 and the core network 101 includes S1-U/NG-U and S1-C/NG-C. Among them, S1-U/NG-U represents the user plane connection, and S1-C/NG-C represents the control plane connection. The secondary node 103 and the core network 101 may or may not have a user plane connection. When there is no user plane connection between the secondary node 103 and the core network 101, the data of the terminal device 104 can be distributed to the secondary node 103 by the primary node 101 at the packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer. The master node 102 may also be called a master base station or a master access network device, and the secondary node 103 may also be called a secondary base station or a slave access network device.
上述主节点102和辅节点103可以统称为网络设备。该网络设备包括但不限于: 无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP),如家庭网关、路由器、服务器、交换机、网桥等,演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved Node B,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission and reception point,TRP或者transmission point,TP)等,还可以为5G,如,新空口(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),或,DU、具有基站功能的路边单元(road side unit,RSU)等。The above-mentioned primary node 102 and secondary node 103 may be collectively referred to as network devices. The network devices include but are not limited to: Access points (APs) in wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) systems, such as home gateways, routers, servers, switches, bridges, etc., evolved Node B (evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base station (for example, home evolved Node B, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit, BBU), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission and reception point, TRP or transmission point, TP ), etc., and can also be 5G, such as a gNB in a new radio (NR) system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of base stations in a 5G system (including multiple antenna panels) The antenna panel, alternatively, can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a DU, a roadside unit (RSU) with base station functions, and the like.
网络设备可以采用CU-DU架构。也即,网络设备可以由CU和至少一个DU构成。这种情况下,网络设备的部分功能部署在CU上,网络设备的另一部分功能部署在DU上。CU和DU是按照协议栈进行功能切分。作为一种实现方式,CU部署有协议栈中的无线资源控制(radio Resource Control,RRC)层,PDCP层,以及业务数据适应协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层;DU部署有协议栈中的无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层,媒体介入控制(media access control,MAC)层,以及物理层(physical layer,PHY)。从而,CU具有RRC、PDCP和SDAP的处理能力。DU具有RLC、MAC和PHY的处理能力。可以理解的是,上述功能的切分仅为一个示例,不构成对CU和DU的限定。也就是说,CU和DU之间还可以有其他功能切分的方式,本申请实施例在此不予赘述。The network device may adopt the CU-DU architecture. That is, the network device may be composed of a CU and at least one DU. In this case, some functions of the network device are deployed on the CU, and another part of the functions of the network device are deployed on the DU. CU and DU are functionally divided according to the protocol stack. As an implementation, the CU is deployed with a radio resource control (RRC) layer, a PDCP layer, and a service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) layer in the protocol stack; DU is deployed with the protocol stack. Radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (media access control, MAC) layer, and physical layer (physical layer, PHY). Thus, the CU has the processing capabilities of RRC, PDCP and SDAP. DU has the processing capability of RLC, MAC and PHY. It can be understood that the division of the above functions is only an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the CU and the DU. That is to say, there may also be other functional division manners between the CU and the DU, which are not described in detail in this embodiment of the present application.
终端设备104是一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端设备104可以被部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以被部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以被部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE)。其中,UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备或计算设备。示例性地,UE可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑。终端设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。具体的,用于实现终端设备104的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。The terminal device 104 is a device with wireless transceiving function. The terminal device 104 can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle; can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); and can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft, balloons and satellites, etc.). The terminal equipment may be user equipment (user equipment, UE). Wherein, the UE includes a handheld device, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device or a computing device with a wireless communication function. Exemplarily, the UE may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with a wireless transceiver function. The terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, intelligent Wireless terminals in power grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on. Specifically, the apparatus for implementing the function of the terminal device 104 may be a terminal device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
为了便于描述,本文实施例中以终端设备104为UE为例,进行说明。For the convenience of description, in the embodiments of this document, the terminal device 104 is taken as a UE as an example for description.
2、部分带宽2. Partial bandwidth
目前,为了适应各种UE的能力,一个UE的接收带宽和发送带宽可以不需要和小区的带宽保持一致。在一个小区中,网络侧可以为UE配置多个部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP),并通知UE当前激活的BWP。随着UE当前激活的BWP的不同,UE的接收和发送带宽可以对应改变,并且带宽的位置也可以对应改变。在双连接或者载波聚合中,对于PCell而言,用于初始接入的BWP称为初始BWP(initial BWP)。对于其他小区而言,初始BWP是网络侧为UE在对应的服务小区进行操作的第一个 BWP。Currently, in order to adapt to the capabilities of various UEs, the reception bandwidth and transmission bandwidth of a UE may not need to be consistent with the bandwidth of a cell. In a cell, the network side may configure multiple bandwidth parts (BWPs) for the UE, and notify the UE of the currently activated BWP. With different BWPs currently activated by the UE, the receiving and transmitting bandwidths of the UE can be changed correspondingly, and the location of the bandwidths can also be changed correspondingly. In dual connectivity or carrier aggregation, for PCell, the BWP used for initial access is called initial BWP (initial BWP). For other cells, the initial BWP is the first BWP that the network side operates in the corresponding serving cell for the UE.
目前,在载波聚合中,当UE需要通信的数据量较少时,为了UE省电以及后续有数据传输时,网络侧能够快速调度UE,在SCell中引入了休眠BWP(dormant BWP)技术。当UE在SCell进入dormant BWP时,该SCell仍然处于激活态。UE在SCell dormant BWP中不监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH),也不在物理下行分享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)传输数据,也不接收物理下行分享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH),从而达到省电的目的。At present, in carrier aggregation, when the amount of data that the UE needs to communicate is small, the network side can quickly schedule the UE in order to save power for the UE and subsequent data transmission, and the dormant BWP (dormant BWP) technology is introduced into the SCell. When the UE enters the dormant BWP in the SCell, the SCell is still in the active state. The UE does not monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) in the SCell dormant BWP, nor transmit data on the physical downlink shared channel (PUSCH), nor receive the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel). , PDSCH), so as to achieve the purpose of power saving.
3、波束(beam)3. Beam
波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术,模拟波束成形技术,混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束可以由一个或多个天线端口所形成,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等。形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口可以看作是一个天线端口集。A beam is a communication resource. The beams can be wide beams, or narrow beams, or other types of beams. The beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technical means. The beamforming technology may be specifically a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, and a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent through different beams. Optionally, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics may be regarded as one beam. A beam can be formed by one or more antenna ports for the transmission of data channels, control channels and sounding signals, etc. One or more antenna ports forming a beam can be viewed as a set of antenna ports.
其中,天线端口是一个逻辑上的概念,一个天线端口可以对应一个物理发射天线,也可以对应多个物理发射天线。在这两种情况下,UE的接收机(receiver)都不会去分解来自同一个天线端口的信号。因为从UE的角度来看,不管信道是由单个物理发射天线形成的,还是由多个物理发射天线合并而成的,这个天线端口对应的参考信号(Reference Signal)就定义了这个天线端口,例如,对应解调参考信号(de-modulation reference signal,DMRS)的天线端口即DMRS端口,终端都可以根据这个参考信号得到这个天线端口的信道估计。每个天线端口对应一个时频资源网格(time/frequency resource grid),有其独自的参考信号。一个天线端口就是一个信道,终端需要根据这个天线端口对应的参考信号进行信道估计和数据解调。The antenna port is a logical concept, and one antenna port may correspond to one physical transmit antenna, or may correspond to multiple physical transmit antennas. In both cases, the UE's receiver will not decompose the signal from the same antenna port. Because from the UE's point of view, no matter whether the channel is formed by a single physical transmit antenna or combined by multiple physical transmit antennas, the reference signal (Reference Signal) corresponding to this antenna port defines this antenna port, for example , corresponding to the antenna port of the demodulation reference signal (de-modulation reference signal, DMRS), that is, the DMRS port, and the terminal can obtain the channel estimation of the antenna port according to the reference signal. Each antenna port corresponds to a time/frequency resource grid and has its own reference signal. An antenna port is a channel, and the terminal needs to perform channel estimation and data demodulation according to the reference signal corresponding to the antenna port.
波束包括发射波束和接收波束。发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指天线阵列对无线信号在空间不同方向上进行加强或削弱接收的分布。Beams include transmit beams and receive beams. Transmitting beams may refer to the distribution of signal strengths formed in different directions in space after signals are transmitted by antennas, and receiving beams may refer to the distribution of antenna arrays that enhance or weaken the reception of wireless signals in different spatial directions.
在目前的NR协议中,波束可通过天线端口准共址(quasi co-location,QCL)关系体现。具体地,两个同波束的信号具有关于空域接收参数(spatial Rx parameter)的QCL关系,即协议中的QCL-Type D:{Spatial Rx parameter}。波束在协议中具体地可以通过各种信号的标识来表示,例如信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)的资源索引,同步信号广播信道块(synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block,可以简称为SS/PBCH block,也可以简称为SSB)的索引,探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)的资源索引,跟踪参考信号(tracking reference signal,TRS)的资源索引。In the current NR protocol, the beam can be represented by the quasi co-location (QCL) relationship of the antenna ports. Specifically, the two signals of the same beam have a QCL relationship with respect to a spatial reception parameter (spatial Rx parameter), that is, QCL-Type D: {Spatial Rx parameter} in the protocol. Beams can be specifically represented by various signal identifiers in the protocol, such as the resource index of channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronous signal/physical broadcast channel block) , which can be referred to as the SS/PBCH block or SSB for short), the resource index of the sounding reference signal (SRS), and the resource index of the tracking reference signal (TRS).
一般情况下,一个波束与一个DMRS端口或一个传输配置编号(transmission configuration index,简称TCI)或一个TRP或一个探测参考信号资源指示(SRS resource indicator,简称SRI)(用于上行数据传输)对应,因此,不同的波束也可以通过不同 的DMRS端口或TCI或TRP或SRI表示。In general, a beam corresponds to a DMRS port or a transmission configuration index (TCI for short) or a TRP or a sounding reference signal resource indicator (SRS resource indicator, SRI for short) (used for uplink data transmission), Therefore, different beams can also be represented by different DMRS ports or TCI or TRP or SRI.
4、QCL关系4. QCL relationship
QCL关系用于表示多个资源之间具有一个或多个相同或者相类似的通信特征,对于具有准共址关系的多个资源,可以采用相同或者类似的通信配置。The QCL relationship is used to indicate that multiple resources have one or more same or similar communication characteristics, and for multiple resources with a quasi-co-location relationship, the same or similar communication configuration may be used.
具体的,具有QCL关系的天线端口对应的信号中具有相同的参数,或者,一个天线端口的参数(也可以称为QCL参数)可用于确定与该天线端口具有QCL关系的另一个天线端口的参数,或者,两个天线端口具有相同的参数,或者,两个天线端口间的参数差小于某阈值。其中,上述参数可以包括以下一项或多项:时延扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(Doppler spread),多普勒频移(Doppler shift),平均时延(average delay),平均增益,空间接收参数(spatial Rx parameters)。其中,空间接收参数可以包括以下的一项或多项:到达角(angle of arrival,简称AOA)、平均AOA、AOA扩展、离开角(angle of departure,简称AOD)、平均离开角AOD、AOD扩展、接收天线空间相关性参数、发送天线空间相关性参数、发射波束、接收波束以及资源标识。Specifically, the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with the QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port (also referred to as QCL parameters) can be used to determine the parameters of another antenna port with the QCL relationship with the antenna port , or, the two antenna ports have the same parameter, or the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is smaller than a certain threshold. The above parameters may include one or more of the following: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, average gain , the spatial Rx parameters. The spatial reception parameters may include one or more of the following: angle of arrival (AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (AOD), average departure angle AOD, AOD extension , receive antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam, and resource identifiers.
5、传输配置指示(transmission configuration indicator,TCI)5. Transmission configuration indicator (TCI)
TCI用于指示PDCCH或者PDSCH的QCL信息。例如,TCI可以用于指示PDCCH或者PDSCH的DMRS与哪个参考信号满足QCL关系,进而UE根据TCI便可以确定参考信号,并采用与该参考信号的空间参数相同或相近的空间参数接收PDCCH/PDSCH。TCI is used to indicate QCL information of PDCCH or PDSCH. For example, the TCI can be used to indicate which reference signal the DMRS of the PDCCH or PDSCH and which satisfies the QCL relationship, and then the UE can determine the reference signal according to the TCI, and receive the PDCCH/PDSCH with the same or similar spatial parameters as the reference signal.
6、接收PDCCH的TCI状态6. Receive the TCI status of the PDCCH
接收PDCCH的TCI状态,可以理解为用于接收PDCCH的TCI状态。The TCI state for receiving the PDCCH can be understood as the TCI state for receiving the PDCCH.
具体的,网络侧可以会为UE的每个下行(downlink,DL)BWP的PDCCH配置中指示一个或多个控制资源集合(control resource set,CORESET),其中一些协议中规定,网络侧最多为每个小区的每个BWP配置3个CORESET。Specifically, the network side may indicate one or more control resource sets (CORESET) in the PDCCH configuration of each downlink (downlink, DL) BWP of the UE, and some of the protocols stipulate that the network side has a maximum of each control resource set (CORESET). Each BWP of each cell is configured with 3 CORESETs.
在每个CORESET中,可以为UE配置一个或多个接收PDCCH的TCI状态(state),这一个或多个接收PDCCH的TCI state,可以称为候选的TCI state。其中,TCI state可以指示PDCCH的DMRS和一个或多个参考信号之间的QCL类型。In each CORESET, one or more TCI states (states) for receiving PDCCH may be configured for the UE, and the one or more TCI states for receiving PDCCH may be referred to as candidate TCI states. Wherein, the TCI state may indicate the QCL type between the DMRS of the PDCCH and one or more reference signals.
另外,网络侧可以会为UE的每个DL BWP的PDCCH配置中指示该BWP的搜索空间(search space),其中在一些协议中规定,网络侧最多为每个小区的每个BWP配置10个搜索空间。每个搜索空间都会关联一个CORESET。然后UE便按照这些CORESETs和对应搜索空间配置进行监听PDCCH。In addition, the network side may indicate the search space (search space) of each DL BWP of the UE in the PDCCH configuration of the BWP, wherein it is stipulated in some protocols that the network side configures a maximum of 10 searches for each BWP of each cell space. Each search space is associated with a CORESET. Then the UE monitors the PDCCH according to these CORESETs and the corresponding search space configuration.
例如,在网络侧通过介质访问控制控制元素(Medium Access Control Control Element,MAC CE)通知UE某个CORESET对应的激活TCI state后,UE便可以根据该激活TCI state,确定监听的PDCCH的DMRS的信息。然后按照对应搜索空间配置便可以对PDCCH进行监听。For example, after the network side notifies the UE of the activated TCI state corresponding to a CORESET through the medium access control element (Medium Access Control Control Element, MAC CE), the UE can determine the DMRS information of the monitored PDCCH according to the activated TCI state. . Then the PDCCH can be monitored according to the corresponding search space configuration.
其中,搜索空间定义了UE如何以及在哪里搜索PDCCH(The IE SearchSpace defines how/where to search for PDCCH candidates),每个搜索空间是关联一个CORESET。Among them, the search space defines how and where the UE searches for PDCCH (The IE SearchSpace defines how/where to search for PDCCH candidates), and each search space is associated with a CORESET.
7、挂起(suspend/store)SCG7. Suspend (suspend/store) SCG
目前,现有技术中在本申请实施例中,UE挂起SCG,可以理解为UE暂停通过 SCG的通信链路进行信令传输和/或数据传输,但终端保留或存储SCG的部分或全部配置。At present, in the prior art, in the embodiments of the present application, the UE suspends the SCG, which can be understood as the UE suspends signaling transmission and/or data transmission through the communication link of the SCG, but the terminal retains or stores part or all of the configuration of the SCG .
挂起SCG是指UE暂时停止使用SCG进行数据传输,但保留SCG的配置。具体地,在UE无需使用SCG为自身提供服务或者说UE无需使用SCG链路时,例如在UE的数据速率低时,则UE可以根据网络侧的指示挂起SCG,如将SCG的配置保留,并且不通过SCG进行数据传输;在需要使用SCG为自身提供服务或者说需要使用SCG链路时,例如在UE的数据速率变高时,UE可以根据网络侧的指示恢复(restore/resume)SCG的配置,并通过SCG进行数据传输。Suspending the SCG means that the UE temporarily stops using the SCG for data transmission, but retains the configuration of the SCG. Specifically, when the UE does not need to use the SCG to provide services for itself or the UE does not need to use the SCG link, for example, when the data rate of the UE is low, the UE can suspend the SCG according to the instruction of the network side, such as retaining the configuration of the SCG, And data transmission is not performed through the SCG; when the SCG needs to be used to provide services for itself or the SCG link needs to be used, for example, when the data rate of the UE becomes high, the UE can restore (restore/resume) the SCG according to the instructions of the network side. configuration, and data transfer via SCG.
需要说明的是,挂起的SCG,也可以称为SCG处于挂起状态,或者SCG处于闲置/去激活(inactive)态,或者UE在SCG中处于休眠(dormancy)或非活跃状态或去激活状态等。恢复SCG可以称为restore SCG或resume SCG。恢复后的SCG或者未挂起时的SCG也可以称为SCG处于忙碌/激活(active)态,或者UE在SCG中处于忙碌或活跃状态或激活状态等。It should be noted that a suspended SCG may also be referred to as the SCG is in a suspended state, or the SCG is in an idle/inactive state, or the UE is in a dormancy or inactive state or a deactivated state in the SCG Wait. Restoring SCG can be called restore SCG or resume SCG. The resumed SCG or the SCG when it is not suspended may also be referred to as the SCG being in a busy/active (active) state, or the UE is in a busy or active state or an active state in the SCG, or the like.
目前,讨论可采用如下方法实现suspend SCG:At present, it is discussed that suspend SCG can be implemented in the following ways:
方案一:采用使UE在PSCell和SCell进入休眠(dormant)的方法。例如,通过使UE在PSCell和SCell进入dormant BWP,来实现suspend SCG。这样一来,UE在PSCell和SCell无需监听PDCCH/PDSCH,也无需发送PUSCH。Scheme 1: adopt the method of making the UE dormant in PSCell and SCell. For example, suspend SCG is implemented by making UE enter dormant BWP in PSCell and SCell. In this way, the UE does not need to monitor the PDCCH/PDSCH in the PSCell and the SCell, nor does it need to send the PUSCH.
方案二:UE在SCG中采用长时间非连续接收(long discontinuous reception,long DRX)的方法。这样一来,UE在SCG中可以长时间不进行数据收发,从而省电。Scheme 2: The UE adopts a long discontinuous reception (long discontinuous reception, long DRX) method in the SCG. In this way, the UE may not send and receive data in the SCG for a long time, thereby saving power.
另外,UE可在suspended SCG中不进行随机接入过程,即不进行SCG RACH。In addition, the UE may not perform the random access procedure in the suspended SCG, that is, not perform the SCG RACH.
8、无线链路监测(radio link monitoring,RLM)8. Radio link monitoring (RLM)
在RLM过程中,UE会检测PCell和PSCell的下行信号质量,并在每个指示周期向高层指示同步或失步指示。其中,UE通常只对PCell和PSCell的激活下行BWP的下行信号质量进行监测。In the RLM process, the UE will detect the downlink signal quality of PCell and PSCell, and indicate synchronization or desynchronization to the upper layer in each indication period. The UE usually only monitors the downlink signal quality of the activated downlink BWP of the PCell and PSCell.
以下以MN和SN均为NR基站为例,对RLM的实现过程进行介绍。需要说明的是,UE监测PCell和PSCell的下行信号质量是独立进行的,即下面的描述中UE是分别对PCell和PSCell进行监测的。具体的,RLM的过程可以包括:The implementation process of the RLM is described below by taking as an example that both the MN and the SN are NR base stations. It should be noted that the UE monitors the downlink signal quality of the PCell and the PSCell independently, that is, in the following description, the UE monitors the PCell and the PSCell respectively. Specifically, the RLM process can include:
S11、确定用于RLM的参考信号。S11. Determine a reference signal for RLM.
在一种实现方式中,网络侧会为UE的主小区和主辅小区的每一个BWP配置一个进行RLM的参考信号(reference signal,RS)集合(这些RS可以被称为RLM的显式RS)。参考信号集合中的参考信号可能是CSI-RS,也可能是SSB。其中该参考信号集合中最多可以有N RLM个参考信号用于无线链路监测。进而,UE便可以根据上述参考信号集合中的参考信号,进行无线链路监测。 In an implementation manner, the network side configures a reference signal (reference signal, RS) set for RLM for each BWP of the primary cell and the primary and secondary cells of the UE (these RSs may be referred to as RLM explicit RSs) . The reference signals in the reference signal set may be CSI-RS or SSB. There may be at most NRLM reference signals in the reference signal set for radio link monitoring. Furthermore, the UE can perform radio link monitoring according to the reference signals in the above reference signal set.
其中,N RLM可以由对应小区的最大SSB数目L max确定,例如N RLM和L max的对应关系可以根据下表1确定: Wherein, NRLM can be determined by the maximum number of SSBs Lmax of the corresponding cell, for example, the corresponding relationship between NRLM and Lmax can be determined according to Table 1 below:
表1Table 1
L max L max N RLM N RLM
44 22
88 44
6464 88
在另一种可能的设计中,网络侧没有为UE配置上述参考信号集合,但网络侧为UE配置了接收PDCCH的TCI状态。其中这些TCI状态中每个TCI状态包括了一个或多个CSI-RS,其中TCI状态所包括的RS可以称为RLM的隐式RS。In another possible design, the network side does not configure the above reference signal set for the UE, but the network side configures the UE with a TCI state for receiving PDCCH. Each of these TCI states includes one or more CSI-RSs, and the RSs included in the TCI states may be called implicit RSs of the RLM.
在这种设计中,网络侧会通知改变接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态。进而,UE可以根据接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,确定该激活TCI状态所包括的参考信号。然后UE便可以根据这些参考信号进行无线链路监测。其中:In this design, the network side will notify to change the active TCI state of the received PDCCH. Furthermore, the UE may determine the reference signal included in the activated TCI state according to the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH. The UE can then perform radio link monitoring based on these reference signals. in:
如果接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态只包括了一个参考信号,则UE用该参考信号进行RLM;If the active TCI state of the received PDCCH includes only one reference signal, the UE uses the reference signal to perform RLM;
如果接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态包括了两个参考信号,且其中一个RS设置为QCL-TypeD,则UE用该设置为QCL-TypeD的参考信号进行RLM。(网络侧不会为UE设置两个参考信号为QCL-TypeD)。If the active TCI state of the received PDCCH includes two reference signals, and one of the RSs is set to QCL-TypeD, the UE performs RLM using the reference signal set to QCL-TypeD. (The network side will not set the two reference signals as QCL-TypeD for the UE).
另外,在RLM中,UE通常不会采用非周期或半静态的参考信号进行无线链路监测。In addition, in RLM, the UE usually does not use aperiodic or semi-static reference signals for radio link monitoring.
另外,在一个小区中,UE最多可以根据N RLM个参考信号进行无线链路监测。其中N RLM可以由对应小区的最大SSB数目L max确定,例如N RLM和L max的对应关系可以根据上述表1确定。 In addition, in a cell, the UE can perform radio link monitoring according to NRLM reference signals at most. The NRLM may be determined by the maximum number of SSBs Lmax of the corresponding cell, for example, the corresponding relationship between the NRLM and Lmax may be determined according to the above Table 1.
具体的,UE从那些关联了搜索空间集合的CORESETs中对应的接收PDCCH的激活TCI state中,选择N RLM个RS用于RLM。其中,UE可以是按照RS的周期从低到高进行选择的。如果多个CORESETs对应的RS具有相同的周期,则UE从CORESET的索引从小到达进行选择。 Specifically, the UE selects N RLM RSs for RLM from the corresponding active TCI states of the received PDCCH in the CORESETs associated with the search space set. The UE may be selected according to the period of the RS from low to high. If the RSs corresponding to multiple CORESETs have the same period, the UE selects from the index of the CORESET arriving from the smallest.
S12、UE的物理层在每个指示周期评估一次对应小区的链路信号质量,得到评估结果。S12, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the corresponding cell once in each indication period, and obtains the evaluation result.
其中,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层评估之前的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量,得到该指示周期对应的评估结果。Wherein, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
其中,在一个指示周期评估链路信号质量之前,可以有多个评估周期。当在该指示周期评估链路信号质量时,可以从这多个评估周期中选择一个评估周期,来评估该评估周期内的链路信号质量。Wherein, there may be multiple evaluation cycles before evaluating the link signal quality in one indication cycle. When evaluating the link signal quality in the indication period, one evaluation period may be selected from the plurality of evaluation periods to evaluate the link signal quality in the evaluation period.
例如,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层评估在该指示周期结束之前最接近的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量,得到该指示周期对应的评估结果。For example, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the closest evaluation period before the indication period ends, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
示例性的,假设RLM的指示周期为T1,评估周期为T2。参照图2,则每间隔时长T1,UE的物理层评估一次小区的链路信号质量,即如图2中UE的物理层需要在t 1、t 2、t 3……t n时刻分别评估小区的链路信号质量。另外,图2中矩形框示出了评估周期为T2的情况下,各评估周期对应的时间。 Exemplarily, it is assumed that the indication period of the RLM is T1, and the evaluation period is T2. Referring to FIG. 2 , the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell once every time interval T1, that is , the physical layer of the UE as shown in FIG. link signal quality. In addition, the rectangular box in FIG. 2 shows the time corresponding to each evaluation period when the evaluation period is T2.
其中,UE的物理层t 1、t 2、t 3……t n时刻评估小区的链路信号质量时,对该指示 周期结束之前最接近的一个评估周期T2内的链路信号质量进行评估。即如图2中,在t 1时刻,UE的物理层根据评估周期N 1内获取的参考信号,对小区的链路信号质量进行评估,得到评估结果;在t 2时刻,UE的物理层是对评估周期N 2内获取的参考信号,对小区的链路信号质量进行评估,得到评估结果;在t 3时刻,UE的物理层是对评估周期N 3内获取的参考信号,对小区的链路信号质量进行评估,得到评估结果……以此类推,在t n时刻,UE的物理层是对评估周期N n内获取的参考信号,对小区的链路信号质量进行评估,得到评估结果。 Wherein, when the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell at time t 1 , t 2 , t 3 , . That is, as shown in Figure 2, at time t 1 , the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal obtained in the evaluation period N 1 , and obtains the evaluation result; at time t 2 , the physical layer of the UE is For the reference signal acquired in the evaluation period N2 , the link signal quality of the cell is evaluated to obtain the evaluation result; at time t3 , the physical layer of the UE is the reference signal acquired in the evaluation period N3, and the link of the cell is evaluated. Evaluate the signal quality of the channel to obtain the evaluation result... and so on, at time t n , the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell based on the reference signal obtained in the evaluation period N n , and obtains the evaluation result.
一方面,在RLM中评估链路信号质量所采用的指示周期的大小与UE是否在当前被测小区配置有DRX、RLM资源的最短周期以及UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期的大小,等参数相关。具体可以分为以下两种情况(可参照3GPP TS 38.133的第8.1.6章描述):On the one hand, the size of the indication period used to evaluate the link signal quality in the RLM, whether the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, the shortest period of the RLM resource, and the size of the DRX period configured by the UE in the current cell under test, etc. parameter related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following two cases (refer to the description in Chapter 8.1.6 of 3GPP TS 38.133):
第一种、在UE在当前被测小区没有配置DRX(即no DRX)的情况下,则把RLM资源的最短周期和10ms之间的最大值作为指示周期。First, in the case that the UE is not configured with DRX in the current cell under test (ie no DRX), the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and 10ms is used as the indication period.
第二种、在UE在当前被测小区配置有DRX的情况下,则把RLM资源的最短周期和DRX周期之间的最大值作为指示周期。或者,在UE在当前被测小区配置有DRX的情况下,当DRX周期小于或等于320ms时,把10ms、1.5×DRX周期和1.5×RLM资源的最短周期的最大值作为指示周期,当DRX周期大于320ms时,则采用DRX周期作为指示周期。The second is that when the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and the DRX period is used as the indication period. Or, in the case where the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, when the DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms, the maximum value of the shortest cycle of 10ms, 1.5×DRX cycle and 1.5×RLM resources is used as the indication cycle, when the DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms When it is greater than 320ms, the DRX cycle is used as the indication cycle.
另一方面,参照3GPP TS 38.133的第8.1章描述,在RLM中评估链路信号质量所采用的评估周期的大小与UE是否在当前被测小区配置有DRX、UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期、评估所采用参考信号的种类(SSB还是CSI-RS)、当前被测小区的BWP所处频段(FR1还是FR2)以及对应指示周期向上层协议栈发送的指示的类型(同步指示还是失步指示),等参数相关。具体可以分为以下四种情况:On the other hand, referring to the description in Chapter 8.1 of 3GPP TS 38.133, the size of the evaluation period used to evaluate the link signal quality in the RLM is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, and the DRX configured by the UE in the cell under test. Period, the type of reference signal used for evaluation (SSB or CSI-RS), the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located (FR1 or FR2), and the type of indication sent to the upper-layer protocol stack corresponding to the indication period (synchronization indication or out-of-synch) indication), and other parameters related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following four situations:
第一种、当评估所采用参考信号为SSB,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR1的情况下,同步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_out_SSB和失步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_in_SSB,可根据下表2来确定: First, when the reference signal used for evaluation is SSB and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR1, the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_SSB of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_SSB of the out-of-synchronization indication can be determined according to the following table 2 to determine:
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000001
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
第二种、当评估所采用参考信号为SSB,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR2的情况下,同步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_out_SSB和失步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_in_SSB,可根据下表3来确定: Second, when the reference signal used in the evaluation is SSB, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR2, the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_SSB of the synchronization instruction and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_SSB of the out-of-synchronization instruction can be determined according to the following table. 3 to determine:
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000002
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
第三种、当评估所采用参考信号为CSI-RS,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR1的情况下,同步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS和失步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_in_CSI-RS,可根据下表4来确定: Third, when the reference signal used for evaluation is CSI-RS, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR1, the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_CSI- RS can be determined according to Table 4 below:
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000003
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和CSI-RS的发送时刻有重叠有关。Mout和Min是与CSI-RS的资源的发送密度以及传输带宽有关的参数,即Mout和Min的取值可以基于CSI-RS的资源的发送密度以及传输带宽得到,例如当CSI-RS的资源的发送密度为3且传输带宽大于等于24个PRB,则Mout=20且Min=10。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the CSI-RS transmission moment. Mout and Min are parameters related to the transmission density and transmission bandwidth of CSI-RS resources, that is, the values of Mout and Min can be obtained based on the transmission density and transmission bandwidth of CSI-RS resources. If the transmission density is 3 and the transmission bandwidth is greater than or equal to 24 PRBs, then Mout=20 and Min=10.
第四种、当评估所采用参考信号为CSI-RS,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR2的情况下,同步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS和失步指示的评估周期T Evaluate_in_CSI-RS,可根据下表5来确定: Fourth, when the reference signal used for evaluation is CSI-RS, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR2, the evaluation period T Evaluate_out_CSI-RS of the synchronization indication and the evaluation period T Evaluate_in_CSI- RS can be determined according to Table 5 below:
表5table 5
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000004
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和CSI-RS的发送时刻有重叠有关。N的取值为1。如果CSI-RS的资源的发送密度为3且传输带宽大于等于24个PRB,则Mout=20且Min=10。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the CSI-RS transmission moment. The value of N is 1. If the transmission density of CSI-RS resources is 3 and the transmission bandwidth is greater than or equal to 24 PRBs, then Mout=20 and Min=10.
具体的,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层根据之前一个评估周期内获取的参考信号,评估小区的链路信号质量得到评估结果。Specifically, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal acquired in the previous evaluation period to obtain an evaluation result.
例如,UE将一个评估周期内的链路信号质量与Qout(Qout用于定义下行无线链路不能可靠接收时,所对应的链路信号质量。Qout可以对应一个失步的误块率(in-sync block error rate,BLERin)的级别)和Qin(Qin用于定义下行无线链路可以以一种比Qout对应的可靠性更高的可靠接收时,所对应的链路信号质量。Qin可以对应一个同步的误块率(out-of-sync block error rate,BLERout)的级别)比较,进而得到评估结果。For example, the UE compares the link signal quality in an evaluation period with Qout (Qout is used to define the corresponding link signal quality when the downlink radio link cannot be reliably received. Qout may correspond to an out-of-sync block error rate (in- sync block error rate, BLERin) level) and Qin (Qin is used to define the link signal quality when the downlink wireless link can be reliably received with a higher reliability than Qout. Qin can correspond to a The synchronization block error rate (out-of-sync block error rate, BLERout) level) is compared, and then the evaluation result is obtained.
S13、在每个指示周期内获取评估结果后,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息。S13. After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
其中,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息,包括:UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送同步指示或失步指示。其中上层协议栈可以是RRC层。The physical layer of the UE sends indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, including: the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack. The upper protocol stack may be the RRC layer.
具体的,当RLM的所有RS对应的链路信号质量都差于Qout时,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送失步指示。当RLM的任何一个RS对应的链路信号质量好于Qin时,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送同步指示。Specifically, when the link signal quality corresponding to all RSs of the RLM is worse than Qout, the physical layer of the UE sends an out-of-synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack. When the link signal quality corresponding to any RS of the RLM is better than Qin, the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
可选地,RLM还包括:S14、当UE的RRC层从物理层收到N310个连续的失步指示时,UE启动一个定时器T310。当启动该定时器之后,UE采用假设当前没有配置DRX对应的评估周期和指示周期进行链路信号质量监测,直到T310超时或停止。Optionally, the RLM further includes: S14. When the RRC layer of the UE receives N310 consecutive out-of-synchronization indications from the physical layer, the UE starts a timer T310. After the timer is started, the UE performs link signal quality monitoring using the evaluation period and the indication period corresponding to the assumption that DRX is not currently configured until T310 times out or stops.
9、链路恢复过程(link recovery procedure)9. Link recovery procedure
UE在DC下,如果MN和SN均为NR基站,则UE在MCG或SCG中的每个服务小区分别进行链路恢复过程。在链路恢复过程中,UE检测MCG或SCG中的每个服务小区的下行信号质量,当其中一个服务小区出现beam失败时,UE执行相应操作,以便重新接入该服务小区。The UE is in DC, if both the MN and the SN are NR base stations, the UE performs the link recovery process in each serving cell in the MCG or SCG respectively. During the link recovery process, the UE detects the downlink signal quality of each serving cell in the MCG or SCG, and when a beam failure occurs in one of the serving cells, the UE performs corresponding operations to re-access the serving cell.
其中,关于链路恢复过程的描述,具体可以参照3GPP TS 38.213协议中第6章节link recovery procedure。For the description of the link recovery process, please refer to Chapter 6 link recovery procedure in the 3GPP TS 38.213 protocol.
示例性的,以下对链路恢复过程进行介绍:Exemplarily, the link recovery process is described as follows:
S21、确定用于链路恢复过程的参考信号。S21. Determine a reference signal for the link recovery process.
在一种实现方式中,对于UE的每个服务小区的BWP,网络侧会为UE配置一个CSI-RS资源集合
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000005
用于链路恢复过程中进行链路信号质量评估(这些CSI-RS资源集合中的CSI-RS都是周期性的)。
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000006
最多包括两个RS。
In an implementation manner, for the BWP of each serving cell of the UE, the network side will configure a CSI-RS resource set for the UE
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000005
It is used for link signal quality assessment during the link recovery process (the CSI-RS in these CSI-RS resource sets are all periodic).
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000006
Include up to two RSs.
在另一种可能的设计中,对于某个服务小区的某个BWP而言,如果网络侧没有为UE配置这个CSI-RS资源集合
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000007
则UE把该BWP中用于接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态中的周期性CSI-RS作为CSI-RS资源集合
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000008
并且如果激活TCI状态中包括了两个RS,则把那个具有QCL-TypeD的RS作为
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000009
中的RS。
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000010
中最大包括两个RS,并且这些RS都是单端口的RS。
In another possible design, for a certain BWP of a certain serving cell, if the network side does not configure this CSI-RS resource set for the UE
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000007
Then the UE uses the periodic CSI-RS in the active TCI state used to receive the PDCCH in the BWP as the CSI-RS resource set
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000008
And if two RSs are included in the active TCI state, the RS with QCL-TypeD is used as the
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000009
RS in .
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000010
A maximum of two RSs are included, and these RSs are single-port RSs.
S22、UE的物理层在每个指示周期评估一次对应小区的链路信号质量。S22, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the corresponding cell once in each indication period.
其中,与上文RLM类似,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层评估之前的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量,得到该指示周期对应的评估结果。例如,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层评估在该指示周期结束之前最接近的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量,得到该指示周期对应的评估结果。Wherein, similar to the above RLM, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period. For example, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the closest evaluation period before the indication period ends, and obtains the evaluation result corresponding to the indication period.
一方面,链路恢复过程中评估链路信号质量所采用的指示周期的大小与UE是否在当前被测小区配置有DRX、
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000011
中各参考信号对应的最短周期以及UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期的大小,等参数相关。具体可以分为以下两种情况(可参照3GPP TS 38.133的第8.5.4章描述):
On the one hand, the size of the indication period used to evaluate the link signal quality in the link recovery process is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000011
The parameters such as the shortest period corresponding to each reference signal and the size of the DRX period configured by the UE in the current cell under test are related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following two cases (refer to Chapter 8.5.4 of 3GPP TS 38.133 for description):
第一种、在UE在当前被测小区没有配置DRX(即no DRX)的情况下,则把
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000012
中各参考信号对应的最短周期和2ms之间的最大值作为指示周期。
First, if the UE is not configured with DRX in the current cell under test (ie no DRX), then
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000012
The maximum value between the shortest period corresponding to each reference signal and 2ms is used as the indicated period.
第二种,在UE在当前被测小区配置有DRX的情况下,参照3GPP TS 38.133的8.5章描述。例如,对于SSB而言,如果DRX周期长度超过320ms时,则该周期为DRX周期;如果DRX周期长度小于或等于320ms,则该周期为max(1.5×DRX周期长度,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000013
中SSB的最短周期),即(1.5×DRX周期长度)和(
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000014
中SSB的最短周期)中的最大值;再例如,对于CSI-RS而言,如果DRX周期长度超过320ms时,则该周期为DRX周期;如果DRX周期长度小于或等于320ms,则该周期为max(1.5×DRX周期长度,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000015
中csi-rs的最短周期)。
The second is described with reference to Chapter 8.5 of 3GPP TS 38.133 when the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test. For example, for SSB, if the DRX cycle length exceeds 320ms, the cycle is the DRX cycle; if the DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the cycle is max(1.5×DRX cycle length,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000013
The shortest period of SSB in ), namely (1.5×DRX period length) and (
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000014
For another example, for CSI-RS, if the DRX cycle length exceeds 320ms, the cycle is the DRX cycle; if the DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the cycle is max (1.5×DRX cycle length,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000015
The shortest period of csi-rs in ).
另一方面,参照3GPP TS 38.133的第8.5章描述,在链路恢复过程中,评估链路信号质量所采用的评估周期的大小与UE是否在当前被测小区配置有DRX、UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期、评估所采用参考信号的种类(SSB还是CSI-RS)以及当前被测小区的BWP所处频段(FR1还是FR2),等参数相关。具体可以分为以下四种情况:On the other hand, referring to the description in Chapter 8.5 of 3GPP TS 38.133, during the link recovery process, the size of the evaluation period used to evaluate the link signal quality is related to whether the UE is configured with DRX in the current cell under test, and whether the UE is currently under test. Parameters such as the DRX cycle configured by the cell, the type of reference signal (SSB or CSI-RS) used for evaluation, and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located are related. Specifically, it can be divided into the following four situations:
第一种、当评估所采用参考信号为SSB,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR1的情况下,评估周期T Evaluate_BFD_SSB,可根据下表6来确定: First, when the reference signal used for evaluation is SSB, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR1, the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_SSB can be determined according to Table 6 below:
表6Table 6
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000016
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB.
第二种、当评估所采用参考信号为SSB,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR2的情况下,评估周期T Evaluate_BFD_SSB,可根据下表7来确定: Second, when the reference signal used for evaluation is SSB and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR2, the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_SSB can be determined according to Table 7 below:
表7Table 7
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000017
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。N的取值为8。The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB. The value of N is 8.
第三种、当评估所采用参考信号为CSI-RS,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR1的情况下,评估周期T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS,可根据下表8来确定: Third, when the reference signal used for evaluation is CSI-RS, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR1, the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS can be determined according to Table 8 below:
表8Table 8
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000018
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。N的取值为1。N的取值为1。如果CSI-RS的资源的发送密度为3,则M BFD=10。 The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB. The value of N is 1. The value of N is 1. If the transmission density of CSI-RS resources is 3, M BFD =10.
第四种、当评估所采用参考信号为CSI-RS,并且当前被测小区的BWP所处频段位于FR2的情况下,评估周期T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS,可根据下表9来确定: Fourth, when the reference signal used for evaluation is CSI-RS, and the frequency band where the BWP of the current cell under test is located is located in FR2, the evaluation period T Evaluate_BFD_CSI-RS can be determined according to Table 9 below:
表9Table 9
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000019
其中,P的取值和该小区是否配置了同频、异频或异系统的测量间隙,以及这些测量间隙是否和SSB的发送时刻有重叠有关。N的取值为1。N的取值为1。如果CSI-RS的资源的发送密度为3,则M BFD=10。 The value of P is related to whether the cell is configured with intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-system measurement gaps, and whether these measurement gaps overlap with the transmission time of the SSB. The value of N is 1. The value of N is 1. If the transmission density of CSI-RS resources is 3, M BFD =10.
具体的,在每个指示周期,UE的物理层根据之前一个评估周期内获取的参考信号,评估小区的链路信号质量得到评估结果。Specifically, in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality of the cell according to the reference signal acquired in the previous evaluation period to obtain an evaluation result.
例如,UE一个评估周期内的链路信号质量与门限Q out,LR(门限Q out,LR定义下行链路信号质量不能可靠地接收时,所对应的链路信号质量。例如,Qout可以对应于假设 PDCCH的传输参数为协议规定的传输参数下对应的传输误码率为10%的级别)比较,进而得到评估结果。 For example, the link signal quality in one evaluation period of the UE and the threshold Q out, LR (the threshold Q out, LR defines the corresponding link signal quality when the downlink signal quality cannot be reliably received. For example, Q out may correspond to Assuming that the transmission parameters of the PDCCH are the corresponding transmission bit error rate levels of 10% under the transmission parameters specified in the protocol), the evaluation results are obtained.
S23、在每个指示周期获取评估结果后,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息。S23. After obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
其中,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息,包括:UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送beam失败的指示信息。其中上层协议栈可以是MAC层。The physical layer of the UE sends the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, including: the physical layer of the UE sends the indication information of the failure of the beam to the upper-layer protocol stack. The upper protocol stack may be the MAC layer.
其中,当UE的物理层用
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000020
中的所有RS评估链路信号质量都比门限Q out,LR差,则UE的物理层给高层发送一个beam失败的指示信息。
Among them, when the physical layer of the UE uses
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000020
If all RSs in the evaluation link signal quality are worse than the thresholds Q out,LR , the physical layer of the UE sends a beam failure indication message to the upper layer.
S24、当UE的MAC层从物理层收到一个服务小区的一个beam失败的指示信息时,UE的MAC层会启动或重启一个定时器,并记录当前接收的beam失败的指示信息次数加1。如果在定时器超时之前,UE的MAC层收到该服务小区的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息时,如果该服务小区为PCell或PSCell,则UE在该小区发起随机接入过程;如果该服务小区是SCell,则UE触发SCell的beam失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)过程。如果该定时器超时了,则UE的MAC层会把当前接收的beam失败指示信息次数设置为0。S24. When the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information of a beam failure of a serving cell from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a timer, and record the number of times of the currently received beam failure indication information plus 1. If before the timer expires, when the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams in the serving cell fail, if the serving cell is PCell or PSCell, the UE initiates a random access procedure in this cell; if the serving cell is PCell or PSCell, the UE initiates a random access procedure; If the cell is an SCell, the UE triggers a beam failure recovery (BFR) process of the SCell. If the timer expires, the MAC layer of the UE will set the number of times of beam failure indication information currently received to 0.
UE触发SCell的BFR过程,包括:The UE triggers the BFR process of the SCell, including:
如果UE当前具有上行数据传输的上行资源,并且上行资源能容纳SCell的BFRMAC CE和对应的MAC子头,则UE的MAC层会生成一个SCell的BFR MAC CE,并将该BFR MAC CE发送至网络侧(如果是主节点的SCell,则发送给主节点;如果是辅节点的SCell,则发送给辅节点);If the UE currently has uplink resources for uplink data transmission, and the uplink resources can accommodate the BFRMAC CE of the SCell and the corresponding MAC subheader, the MAC layer of the UE will generate a BFR MAC CE of the SCell and send the BFR MAC CE to the network. side (if it is the SCell of the master node, it will be sent to the master node; if it is the SCell of the slave node, it will be sent to the slave node);
否则,如果上行资源能容纳缩短的(truncated)SCell的BFR MAC CE和对应的MAC子头,则UE的MAC层会生成一个缩短的BFR MAC CE,并将该缩短的BFR MAC CE发送至网络侧(如果是主节点的SCell,则发送给主节点;如果是辅节点的SCell,则发送给辅节点);Otherwise, if the uplink resources can accommodate the shortened (truncated) SCell's BFR MAC CE and the corresponding MAC subheader, the MAC layer of the UE will generate a shortened BFR MAC CE and send the shortened BFR MAC CE to the network side (If it is the SCell of the primary node, it will be sent to the primary node; if it is the SCell of the secondary node, it will be sent to the secondary node);
否则,为SCell beam失败恢复触发调度请求,之后UE向(如果是主节点的SCell,则发送给主节点;如果是辅节点的SCell,则发送给辅节点)发送BFR MAC CE。Otherwise, a scheduling request is triggered for SCell beam failure recovery, and then the UE sends a BFR MAC CE to (if it is the SCell of the primary node, it is sent to the primary node; if it is the SCell of the secondary node, it is sent to the secondary node).
其中,BFR MAC CE中携带的内容主要有:1)服务小区索引:用于指示哪一个服务小区检测到beam失败;2)信号质量高于或等于一个门限Q out,LR的候选beam标识。 Among them, the contents carried in the BFR MAC CE mainly include: 1) serving cell index: used to indicate which serving cell detects beam failure; 2) candidate beam identifier whose signal quality is higher than or equal to a threshold Q out,LR .
通过上述相关技术的描述可知,目前UE在无线链路监测中,会根据是否在当前被测小区配置有DRX、UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期、评估所采用参考信号的种类(SSB还是CSI-RS)以及当前被测小区的BWP所处频段(FR1还是FR2)等参数,来确定用于评估链路信号质量的评估周期。也就是说,无论UE在挂起SCG还是恢复了SCG的情况下,都会采用相同的方法来确定评估周期。这就导致UE在无线链路监测过程中,所采用的评估周期与UE当前的状态不匹配。It can be seen from the description of the above-mentioned related technologies that, in the current radio link monitoring, the UE will evaluate the type of reference signal (SSB or SS) according to whether DRX is configured in the current cell under test, the DRX cycle configured by the UE in the cell under test, and the type of reference signal used. CSI-RS) and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located, to determine the evaluation period for evaluating the link signal quality. That is to say, regardless of whether the UE suspends the SCG or resumes the SCG, the same method will be used to determine the evaluation period. This results in that the evaluation period adopted by the UE during the radio link monitoring process does not match the current state of the UE.
针对上述技术问题,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,本申请实施例提供的通信方法,可以应用于图1所示通信系统中。以下实施例中以通信系统中包括的终端设备为UE为例,进行说明。如图3所示,该方法包括:In response to the above technical problems, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 . In the following embodiments, the terminal device included in the communication system is an UE as an example for description. As shown in Figure 3, the method includes:
S101、当UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,UE根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链 路信号质量的第一评估结果。S101. When the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE obtains a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period.
其中,SCG处于去激活状态,可以指将SCG的配置挂起,并且UE不通过SCG进行数据传输的状态。从UE的角度来讲,SCG处于去激活状态,也可以认为是UE在SCG中处于去激活状态。在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,UE会挂起(或保留)SCG的配置但不会完全释放SCG的配置,以便UE需要通过SCG进行数据传输时,可以利用挂起(或保留)的SCG的配置恢复SCG,使SCG恢复至激活状态。The SCG is in a deactivated state, which may refer to a state in which the configuration of the SCG is suspended, and the UE does not transmit data through the SCG. From the perspective of the UE, the SCG is in a deactivated state, and it can also be considered that the UE is in a deactivated state in the SCG. When the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE will suspend (or retain) the configuration of the SCG but not completely release the configuration of the SCG, so that when the UE needs to transmit data through the SCG, it can use the suspended (or reserved) SCG The configuration restores the SCG to return the SCG to the active state.
其中,第一评估周期,具体指在UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,在对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估时,每次评估结果所反映的链路信号质量所对应的时间长度。以图2为例,若第一评估周期为T2,则在UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,在对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估时,每次对一个长为T2的时间段内的链路信号质量进行评估,得到评估结果。The first evaluation period specifically refers to the time length corresponding to the link signal quality reflected by each evaluation result when evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state. Taking FIG. 2 as an example, if the first evaluation period is T2, when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, when evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG, each time a link within a time period of T2 is evaluated. The signal quality of the channel is evaluated, and the evaluation result is obtained.
S102、当UE的SCG处于激活状态时,UE根据第二评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果。S102. When the SCG of the UE is in an active state, the UE acquires a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period.
其中,与第一评估周期同理,第二评估周期具体指在UE的SCG处于激活状态时,在对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估时,每次评估结果所反映的链路信号质量所对应的时间长度。Wherein, in the same way as the first evaluation period, the second evaluation period specifically refers to when the SCG of the UE is in the active state, when the link signal quality of the SCG is evaluated, the link signal quality reflected by each evaluation result corresponds to length of time.
在本实施例中,在对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估的情况下,例如在UE进行对SCG的无线链路监测,或者进行对SCG的链路恢复过程的情况下,UE可以在SCG处于不同状态(去激活状态或激活状态)下,采用与当前状态对应的评估周期来获取对SCG的链路信号质量的评估结果。通过设置对应于不同SCG状态的评估周期,能够兼顾终端设备的功耗与评估结果的准确性,从而更灵活地进行无线链路监测或链路恢复过程。例如,在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,对应更长的评估周期;在SCG处于激活状态的情况下,对应更短的评估周期。这样一来,便可以使UE在SCG处于去激活状态下的能耗低于SCG处于激活状态下的能耗。在一种实施方式中,在执行S101或S102之前,UE可以根据UE的SCG的当前状态(即去激活状态或者激活状态),来确定是执行S101还是执行S102,进而按照当前状态对应的评估周期(即第一评估周期或第二评估周期)获取对SCG的链路信号质量的评估结果。In this embodiment, in the case of evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG, for example, when the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG, or performs a link recovery process on the SCG, the UE may be in the SCG state. In different states (deactivated state or activated state), the evaluation period corresponding to the current state is used to obtain the evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG. By setting the evaluation period corresponding to different SCG states, the power consumption of the terminal device and the accuracy of the evaluation result can be taken into account, so that the wireless link monitoring or link recovery process can be performed more flexibly. For example, when the SCG is in a deactivated state, it corresponds to a longer evaluation period; when the SCG is in an active state, it corresponds to a shorter evaluation period. In this way, the energy consumption of the UE when the SCG is in the deactivated state can be lower than the energy consumption when the SCG is in the activated state. In one embodiment, before executing S101 or S102, the UE may determine whether to execute S101 or S102 according to the current state (ie, the deactivated state or the activated state) of the SCG of the UE, and then according to the evaluation period corresponding to the current state (ie, the first evaluation period or the second evaluation period) to obtain the evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG.
其中,本实施例中,根据评估周期(即第一评估周期或第二评估周期)获取对SCG的链路信号质量的评估结果(即第一评估结果或第二评估结果),这一内容的具体实现过程,可参照上述对无线链路监测的介绍中,S12中UE的物理层在每个指示周期评估之前的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量并得到该指示周期对应的评估结果的相应描述,或者可以参照上述对链路恢复过程的介绍中S22中在每个指示周期,UE的物理层评估之前的一个评估周期内的链路信号质量并得到该指示周期对应的评估结果的相应描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, in this embodiment, the evaluation result (that is, the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result) of the link signal quality of the SCG is obtained according to the evaluation period (that is, the first evaluation period or the second evaluation period), and the content of this content is For the specific implementation process, refer to the above-mentioned introduction to wireless link monitoring. In S12, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in an evaluation period before each indication period and obtains the corresponding evaluation result corresponding to the indication period. Description, or can refer to the above description of the link recovery process in S22 in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE evaluates the link signal quality in the previous evaluation period and obtains the corresponding description of the indication period corresponding to the evaluation result , and will not be repeated here.
本实施例上述步骤S101和S102,可以理解为,UE可以按照SCG的当前状态所对应的评估周期,来获取对SCG链路信号质量的评估结果。因此,在一些具体场景中,例如,在RLM资源的最短周期为特定值、或者DRX周期为特定值,SCG处于去激活状态所对应的第一评估周期,与SCG处于激活状态的第二评估周期的长度可能是相等的。但本申请所提供方法在具体实现方式中,至少存在一些场景,SCG处于去激活 状态和SCG处于激活状态下,所对应的第一评估周期和第二评估周期的长度是不相等的。In the above steps S101 and S102 in this embodiment, it can be understood that the UE can obtain the evaluation result of the signal quality of the SCG link according to the evaluation period corresponding to the current state of the SCG. Therefore, in some specific scenarios, for example, when the shortest period of the RLM resource is a specific value, or the DRX period is a specific value, the first evaluation period corresponding to the SCG in the deactivated state is the same as the second evaluation period in which the SCG is in the active state. may be equal in length. However, in the specific implementation manner of the method provided by the present application, there are at least some scenarios. When the SCG is in the deactivated state and the SCG is in the activated state, the lengths of the corresponding first evaluation period and the second evaluation period are not equal.
其中,本发明中网络设备可以通过现有的各种技术指示UE的SCG进入去激活状态,或指示UE的SCG从去激活状态恢复到激活状态。网络设备可以是UE的主节点或辅节点,本申请对此可以不作限制。Wherein, in the present invention, the network device can instruct the SCG of the UE to enter the deactivated state through various existing technologies, or instruct the SCG of the UE to recover from the deactivated state to the activated state. The network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE, which may not be limited in this application.
S103、UE根据第一评估结果或第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程。S103. The UE performs radio link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.
也就是说,当将本实施例所提供方法应用于对SCG进行RLM的场景下,若SCG处于去激活状态,则UE根据第一评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测;若SCG处于激活状态,则UE根据第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测。That is to say, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the scenario of performing RLM on the SCG, if the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG according to the first evaluation result; if the SCG is in the activated state , the UE performs radio link monitoring on the SCG according to the second evaluation result.
同理,当将本实施例所提供方法应用于对SCG进行链路恢复过程的场景下,若SCG处于去激活状态,则UE根据第一评估结果,对SCG进行链路恢复过程;若SCG处于激活状态,则UE根据第二评估结果,对SCG进行链路恢复过程。Similarly, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the scenario of performing the link recovery process on the SCG, if the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE performs the link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result; In the active state, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the second evaluation result.
其中,本实施例中,根据评估结果(即第一评估结果或第二评估结果),对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程,这一内容的具体实现过程,可参照上述对无线链路监测的介绍中,S13中在每个指示周期内获取评估结果后,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息的相应描述,或者可以参照上述对链路恢复过程的介绍中S23中在每个指示周期获取评估结果后,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送评估结果对应的指示信息的相应描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, in this embodiment, according to the evaluation result (ie, the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result), the wireless link monitoring or the link recovery process is performed on the SCG. In the introduction of link monitoring, after obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period in S13, the physical layer of the UE sends a corresponding description of the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, or you can refer to the above-mentioned introduction to the link recovery process. In S23, after obtaining the evaluation result in each indication period, the physical layer of the UE sends a corresponding description of the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack, which will not be repeated here.
在一种实现方式中,本实施例所提供方法还包括:In an implementation manner, the method provided in this embodiment further includes:
S104、根据第一指示周期,UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息。或者,根据第二指示周期,UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第二评估结果对应的指示信息。S104. According to the first indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack. Or, according to the second indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
也就是说,本实现方式中,当SCG处于去激活状态时,则根据第一指示周期,UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息;当SCG处于激活状态时,则根据第二指示周期,UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第二评估结果对应的指示信息。That is to say, in this implementation manner, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, according to the first indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack; when the SCG is in the activated state, then According to the second indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
通过上述实现方式,UE可以在SCG处于不同状态(去激活状态或激活状态)下,根据与当前状态对应的指示周期(第一指示周期或第二指示周期),来使UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报评估结果对应的指示信息。Through the above implementation manner, when the SCG is in different states (deactivated state or activated state), the UE can move the physical layer of the UE to the upper layer according to the indication period (the first indication period or the second indication period) corresponding to the current state. The protocol stack reports the indication information corresponding to the evaluation result.
例如,在SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,对应更长的指示周期;在SCG处于激活状态的情况下,对应更短的指示周期。这样一来,便可以使UE在SCG处于去激活状态下的能耗低于SCG处于激活状态下的能耗。For example, when the SCG is in a deactivated state, it corresponds to a longer indication period; when the SCG is in an activated state, it corresponds to a shorter indication period. In this way, the energy consumption of the UE when the SCG is in the deactivated state can be lower than the energy consumption when the SCG is in the activated state.
本实施例上述步骤S104,可以理解为,UE可以按照SCG的当前状态所对应的指示周期,向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息。因此,在一些具体场景中,例如,DRX周期为特定值,SCG处于去激活状态所对应的第一指示周期,与SCG处于激活状态的第二指示周期的长度可能是相等的。但本申请所提供方法在具体实现方式中,至少存在一些场景,SCG处于去激活状态和SCG处于激活状态下,所对应的第一指示周期和第二指示周期的长度是不相等的。In the above step S104 in this embodiment, it can be understood that the UE may report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the indication period corresponding to the current state of the SCG. Therefore, in some specific scenarios, for example, when the DRX cycle is a specific value, the length of the first indication period corresponding to the SCG in the deactivated state may be equal to the length of the second indication period when the SCG is in the activated state. However, in the specific implementation manner of the method provided in this application, there are at least some scenarios where the lengths of the corresponding first indication period and the second indication period are unequal when the SCG is in the deactivated state and the SCG is in the activated state.
其中,当将本实施例所提供方法应用于无线链路监测时,上层协议栈具体可以是RRC层。当将本实施例所提供方法应用于链路恢复过程时,上层协议栈具体可以是MAC层。Wherein, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the radio link monitoring, the upper-layer protocol stack may specifically be the RRC layer. When the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the link recovery process, the upper-layer protocol stack may specifically be the MAC layer.
其中,第一指示周期,可以理解为UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息的周期。第二指示周期,可以理解为UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息的周期。The first indication period may be understood as a period in which the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack. The second indication period may be understood as a period in which the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
例如,参照上述S12-S13内容,当UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,UE在每个第一指示周期获取之前一个第一评估周期内对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果,并且在每个第一指示周期获取第一评估结果后,UE的物理层向RRC层上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息。For example, referring to the content of S12-S13 above, when the SCG of the UE is in the deactivated state, the UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, and After obtaining the first evaluation result in each first indication period, the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the RRC layer.
其中,第一评估结果对应的指示信息,可以包括:同步指示或失步指示。例如,当第一评估结果指示RLM的所有RS对应的链路信号质量都差于Qout时,UE的物理层向RRC层发送失步指示。当第一评估结果指示RLM的任何一个RS对应的链路信号质量好于Qin时,UE的物理层向上层协议栈发送同步指示。The indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result may include: a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication. For example, when the first evaluation result indicates that the link signal quality corresponding to all RSs of the RLM is worse than Qout, the physical layer of the UE sends an out-of-synchronization indication to the RRC layer. When the first evaluation result indicates that the link signal quality corresponding to any RS of the RLM is better than Qin, the physical layer of the UE sends a synchronization indication to the upper-layer protocol stack.
另外,当UE的SCG处于激活状态时,UE在每个第二指示周期获取之前一个第二评估周期内对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果,并且在每个第二指示周期获取第二评估结果后,UE的物理层向RRC层上报第二评估结果对应的指示信息。In addition, when the SCG of the UE is in the active state, the UE obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous second evaluation cycle in each second indication cycle, and obtains the first evaluation result in each second indication cycle. After the second evaluation result, the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the RRC layer.
其中,与第一评估结果对应的指示信息类似的,第二评估结果对应的指示信息可以包括:同步指示或失步指示。Wherein, similar to the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result, the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result may include: a synchronization indication or an out-of-synchronization indication.
再例如,参照上述S22-S23内容,当UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,UE在每个第一指示周期获取之前一个第一评估周期内对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果,并且在每个第一指示周期获取第一评估结果后,若第一评估结果指示UE的物理层用
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000021
中的所有RS评估链路信号质量都比门限Q out,LR差,则UE的物理层向MAC层上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息(即beam失败的指示信息)。
For another example, referring to the content of S22-S23 above, when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, and After obtaining the first evaluation result in each first indication period, if the first evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000021
The signal quality of all RS evaluation links in is worse than the threshold Q out,LR , and the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result (that is, the indication information of beam failure) to the MAC layer.
另外,当UE的SCG处于激活状态时,UE在每个第二指示周期获取之前一个第二评估周期内对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果,并且在每个第二指示周期获取第二评估结果后,若第二评估结果指示UE的物理层用
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000022
中的所有RS评估链路信号质量都比门限Q out,LR差,则UE的物理层向MAC层上报第二评估结果对应的指示信息(即beam失败的指示信息)。
In addition, when the SCG of the UE is in the active state, the UE obtains the second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG in the previous second evaluation cycle in each second indication cycle, and obtains the first evaluation result in each second indication cycle. After the second evaluation result, if the second evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000022
The signal quality of all RSs in the evaluation link is worse than the threshold Q out,LR , then the physical layer of the UE reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result (that is, the indication information of beam failure) to the MAC layer.
其中,在UE的SCG处于激活状态的情况中,UE可以根据上述S12或S22中描述的在无线链路监测或链路恢复过程中确定评估周期的方式,来确定第二评估周期。Wherein, when the SCG of the UE is in an active state, the UE may determine the second evaluation period according to the manner of determining the evaluation period during the radio link monitoring or link recovery process described in S12 or S22 above.
可选地,在本申请的一种实现方式中,上述第一评估周期可以是由来自网络设备的指示信息获取的,以下图4以及图5分别描述了两种具体的实现方式:Optionally, in an implementation manner of the present application, the above-mentioned first evaluation period may be obtained from indication information from a network device. The following Figures 4 and 5 describe two specific implementations respectively:
实现方式一:如图4所示,本实施例上述方法还可以包括:Implementation mode 1: As shown in FIG. 4 , the above method in this embodiment may further include:
S105、UE接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。S105. The UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
其中,第一指示信息,用于指示第一评估周期。The first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period.
其中,网络设备可以是UE的主节点或辅节点。也就是说,第一指示信息可以是有主节点发送至UE,也可以由辅节点发送至UE,本申请对此可以不作限制。Wherein, the network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE. That is to say, the first indication information may be sent by the master node to the UE, or may be sent by the secondary node to the UE, which is not limited in this application.
其中,网络设备可以通过各种技术向UE发送第一指示信息。例如,可以通过网 络设备向UE发送MAC CE或RRC消息或L1的指示消息中的任一种方式,实现网络设备向UE通过第一指示信息。The network device may send the first indication information to the UE through various technologies. For example, the network device can send the first indication information to the UE by any one of the manners in which the network device sends a MAC CE or RRC message or an L1 indication message to the UE.
在图4所示的实现方式中,第一评估周期可以是网络设备通知给UE的。本实现方式可以避免评估周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免UE消耗不必要的电量,尤其适用于SCG处于去激活状态并且没有为SCG配置DRX的场景,可以避免UE采用非DRX对应的评估周期来评估链路信号质量导致的耗电量高的问题。另外,在本实现方式中,由于第一评估周期可以是网络设备通知给UE的,因此还可以实现由网络设备控制第一评估周期的大小的效果。In the implementation shown in FIG. 4 , the first evaluation period may be notified to the UE by the network device. This implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the UE from consuming unnecessary power, and is especially suitable for the scenario where the SCG is in a deactivated state and no DRX is configured for the SCG. , the problem of high power consumption caused by the UE using an evaluation period not corresponding to DRX to evaluate the link signal quality can be avoided. In addition, in this implementation manner, since the first evaluation period may be notified to the UE by the network device, the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device may also be achieved.
实现方式二:如图5所示,本实施例上述方法还可以包括:Implementation mode 2: As shown in FIG. 5 , the above method in this embodiment may further include:
S106、UE接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息。S106: The UE receives the first indication information from the network device.
其中,网络设备可以是UE的主节点或辅节点。第一指示信息,用于指示第一缩放因子。Wherein, the network device may be the primary node or the secondary node of the UE. The first indication information is used to indicate the first scaling factor.
其中,与S105中描述类似,网络设备可以通过各种技术向UE发送第一指示信息。Wherein, similar to the description in S105, the network device may send the first indication information to the UE through various technologies.
S107、UE根据第三评估周期和第一缩放因子,确定第一评估周期。S107. The UE determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
其中,第三评估周期,可以是现有技术中所采用的一种评估周期。例如,第三评估周期,可以是表2-9中任一表格中,UE按照UE在当前被测小区配置是否有DRX、UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期、评估所采用参考信号的种类(SSB还是CSI-RS)以及当前被测小区的BWP所处频段(FR1还是FR2)等参数确定的评估周期。又例如第三评估周期是UE按照UE在当前被检测小区未配置DRX或按照UE在当前被检测小区采用某个特定DRX周期按照表2-9中表格确定的评估周期。本实施例中,对第三评估周期的大小可以不做限制。The third evaluation cycle may be an evaluation cycle adopted in the prior art. For example, the third evaluation period can be any one of Tables 2-9. The UE is configured according to whether the UE has DRX in the current cell under test, the DRX period configured by the UE in the cell under test, and the type of reference signal used for evaluation. The evaluation period is determined by parameters such as (SSB or CSI-RS) and the frequency band (FR1 or FR2) where the BWP of the current cell under test is located. For another example, the third evaluation period is an evaluation period determined by the UE according to the table in Table 2-9 according to the UE not configuring DRX in the currently detected cell or according to the UE using a specific DRX period in the currently detected cell. In this embodiment, the size of the third evaluation period may not be limited.
在图5所示的实现方式中,UE可以根据来自网络设备的第一缩放因子,根据第三评估周期和第一缩放因子来确定第一评估周期(例如,根据第一缩放因子,对第三评估周期进行缩放,进而得到第一评估周期)。这样一来,本实现方式可以避免评估周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免UE消耗不必要的电量,尤其适用于SCG处于去激活状态并且没有为SCG配置DRX的场景,可以避免UE采用非DRX对应的评估周期来评估链路信号质量导致的耗电量高的问题。另外,在本实现方式中,还可以实现由网络设备控制第一评估周期的大小的效果。In the implementation shown in FIG. 5, the UE may determine the first evaluation period according to the first scaling factor from the network device, according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor (eg, according to the first scaling factor, for the third The evaluation period is scaled to obtain the first evaluation period). In this way, this implementation can prevent the size of the evaluation period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR and the size of the DRX period, thereby preventing the UE from consuming unnecessary power, especially when the SCG is in a deactivated state and is not used for the SCG In the scenario where DRX is configured, the problem of high power consumption caused by the UE using a non-DRX-corresponding evaluation period to evaluate the link signal quality can be avoided. In addition, in this implementation manner, the effect of controlling the size of the first evaluation period by the network device can also be achieved.
可选地,上述第一指示周期可以是由UE根据预定规则获取的。在一种实现方式中,第一评估周期可以是预定的DRX周期对应的评估周期。Optionally, the above-mentioned first indication period may be acquired by the UE according to a predetermined rule. In an implementation manner, the first evaluation period may be an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
例如,第一评估周期,可以是表2-9中任一表格中,一个预定的DRX周期对应的评估周期。For example, the first evaluation period may be an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period in any of Tables 2-9.
例如,预定的DRX周期,可以是当前协议中,最大的DRX周期(如10240ms)。再例如,预定的DRX周期,可以是大于320ms的一个DRX周期。For example, the predetermined DRX cycle may be the maximum DRX cycle (eg, 10240 ms) in the current protocol. For another example, the predetermined DRX cycle may be a DRX cycle greater than 320 ms.
可选地,在本申请的一种实现方式中,S104中描述的第一指示周期可以是由来自网络设备的指示信息获取的,以下图6以及图7分别描述了两种具体的实现方式。Optionally, in an implementation manner of the present application, the first indication period described in S104 may be obtained from indication information from a network device, and the following two specific implementation manners are respectively described in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 .
实现方式一:如图6所示,该方法还包括:Implementation mode 1: As shown in Figure 6, the method further includes:
S108、UE接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。S108: The UE receives the second indication information from the network device.
其中,第二指示信息用于指示第一指示周期。其中,网络设备为UE的主节点或辅节点。The second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period. Wherein, the network device is the primary node or secondary node of the UE.
具体的,UE在接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息后,便可以根据第二指示信息确定第一指示周期。然后,UE便可以根据第一指示周期,UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报第一评估结果对应的指示信息。Specifically, after receiving the second indication information from the network device, the UE may determine the first indication period according to the second indication information. Then, according to the first indication period, the UE's physical layer can report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
在本实现方式中,第一指示周期可以是网络设备通知给UE的。这样一来,相比UE利用现有技术中确定评估周期的方式来确定第一指示周期,本实现方式可以避免指示周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免UE消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本实现方式中,由于第一指示周期可以是网络设备通知给UE的,因此还可以实现由网络设备控制第一指示周期的大小的效果。In this implementation manner, the first indication period may be notified to the UE by the network device. In this way, compared with the UE using the prior art to determine the evaluation period to determine the first indication period, this implementation can prevent the indication period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR, DRX period size, etc. Avoid unnecessary power consumption by the UE. In addition, in this implementation manner, since the first indication period may be notified to the UE by the network device, the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device may also be achieved.
实现方式二:如图7所示,该方法还包括:Implementation Mode 2: As shown in Figure 7, the method further includes:
S109、UE接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息。S109: The UE receives the second indication information from the network device.
其中,第二指示信息用于指示第二缩放因子。其中,网络设备为UE的主节点或辅节点;The second indication information is used to indicate the second scaling factor. Wherein, the network device is the primary node or secondary node of the UE;
S110、UE根据第三指示周期和第二缩放因子确定第一指示周期。S110. The UE determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
其中,第三指示周期,可以是现有技术中所采用的一种指示周期。例如,第三指示周期,可以是现有技术中,UE按照UE在当前被测小区配置是否有DRX、UE在当前被测小区配置的DRX周期、RLM或链路恢复过程中所用参考信号的周期等参数确定的指示周期。又例如第三指示周期是UE按照UE在当前被检测小区未配置DRX或按照UE在当前被检测小区采用某个特定DRX周期确定的指示周期。本实施例中,对第三指示周期的大小可以不做限制。The third indication period may be an indication period adopted in the prior art. For example, the third indication period may be, in the prior art, whether the UE has DRX configured in the current cell under test, the DRX period configured by the UE in the current cell under test, the RLM or the period of the reference signal used in the link recovery process and other parameters to determine the indication period. For another example, the third indication period is an indication period determined by the UE according to that the UE is not configured with DRX in the currently detected cell or according to the UE using a certain specific DRX period in the currently detected cell. In this embodiment, the size of the third indication period may not be limited.
在本实现方式中,UE可以根据来自网络设备的第二缩放因子,根据第三指示周期和第二缩放因子来确定第一指示周期(例如,根据第二缩放因子,对第三指示周期进行缩放,进而得到第一指示周期)。这样一来,相比UE利用现有技术中确定评估周期的方式来确定第一指示周期,本实现方式可以避免指示周期的大小受到被测小区是否配置DXR、DRX周期大小等参数的影响,从而避免UE消耗不必要的电量。另外,在本实现方式中,还可以实现由网络设备控制第一指示周期的大小的效果。In this implementation manner, the UE may determine the first indication period according to the second scaling factor from the network device, according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor (for example, scaling the third indication period according to the second scaling factor) , and then obtain the first indication period). In this way, compared with the UE using the prior art to determine the evaluation period to determine the first indication period, this implementation can prevent the indication period from being affected by parameters such as whether the cell under test is configured with DXR, DRX period size, etc. Avoid unnecessary power consumption by the UE. In addition, in this implementation manner, the effect of controlling the size of the first indication period by the network device can also be achieved.
在又一种实现方式中,在本实施例上述方法中,第一指示周期可以是预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。In yet another implementation manner, in the above method in this embodiment, the first indication period may be an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
例如,预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期,可以是按照上述S12或S22中所采用的确定指示周期的方式中,一个预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。例如,在将本实施例所提供方法应用于RLM时,第一指示周期可以是RLM资源的最短周期和预定的DRX周期之间的最大值。再例如,在将本实施例所提供方法应用于RLM时,当预定的DRX周期小于或等于320ms时,第一指示周期可以是把10ms、1.5×预定的DRX周期和1.5×RLM资源的最短周期的最大值,当预定的DRX周期大于320ms时,则将预定的DRX周期作为第一指示周期。For example, the indication period corresponding to the predetermined DRX period may be an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period in the manner of determining the indication period adopted in the above S12 or S22. For example, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to RLM, the first indication period may be the maximum value between the shortest period of the RLM resource and the predetermined DRX period. For another example, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to RLM, when the predetermined DRX cycle is less than or equal to 320ms, the first indication cycle may be the shortest cycle of 10ms, 1.5×predetermined DRX cycle, and 1.5×RLM resources. The maximum value of , when the predetermined DRX cycle is greater than 320ms, the predetermined DRX cycle is used as the first indication cycle.
例如,在将本实施例所提供方法应用于链路恢复过程时,对于采用SSB评估链路信号质量而言,如果预定的DRX周期长度超过320ms时,则第一指示周期可以为预定的DRX周期;如果预定的DRX周期长度小于或等于320ms,则第一指示周期为 max(1.5×预定的DRX周期,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000023
中SSB的最短周期),即(1.5×预定的DRX周期)和(
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000024
中SSB的最短周期)中的最大值;再例如,在将本实施例所提供方法应用于链路恢复过程时,对于采用CSI-RS评估链路信号质量而言,如果预定的DRX周期长度超过320ms时,则第一指示周期为预定的DRX周期;如果预定的DRX周期长度小于或等于320ms,则该周期为max(1.5×预定的DRX周期,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000025
中csi-rs的最短周期)。
For example, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the link recovery process, for using SSB to evaluate the link signal quality, if the length of the predetermined DRX cycle exceeds 320ms, the first indication cycle may be the predetermined DRX cycle ; If the predetermined DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the first indication cycle is max(1.5×predetermined DRX cycle,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000023
The shortest period of SSB in ), namely (1.5×predetermined DRX period) and (
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000024
For another example, when the method provided in this embodiment is applied to the link recovery process, for using CSI-RS to evaluate link signal quality, if the predetermined DRX cycle length exceeds 320ms, the first indication cycle is the predetermined DRX cycle; if the predetermined DRX cycle length is less than or equal to 320ms, the cycle is max(1.5×predetermined DRX cycle,
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000025
The shortest period of csi-rs in ).
其中,可以根据实际需要确定预定的DRX周期的取值。例如,预定的DRX周期可以是当前协议中大的DRX周期(如10240ms)。再例如,预定的DRX周期,可以是大于320ms的一个DRX周期。对于预定的DRX周期的取值,本申请可以不做限制。The value of the predetermined DRX cycle may be determined according to actual needs. For example, the predetermined DRX cycle may be a large DRX cycle (eg, 10240ms) in the current protocol. For another example, the predetermined DRX cycle may be a DRX cycle greater than 320 ms. This application may not limit the value of the predetermined DRX cycle.
需要说明的是,在一些场景下,当不需要根据SCG的不同状态(去激活状态或激活状态)选择不同评估周期对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估,但是需要根据SCG的不同状态选择不同指示周期向UE的上层协议栈上报评估结果的情况下,本申请所提供通信方法,在执行S107之前可以不执行S101-S103的内容。也就是说,在一些场景下,本申请实施例上述方法中,S107-S110所描述的技术手段可以在不采用S101-S103所提供方法的情况下单独实施,以实现相应的技术效果。It should be noted that, in some scenarios, it is not necessary to select different evaluation periods to evaluate the link signal quality of the SCG according to the different states of the SCG (deactivated state or activated state), but it is necessary to select different indications according to the different states of the SCG. In the case where the evaluation result is periodically reported to the upper-layer protocol stack of the UE, the content of S101-S103 may not be executed before executing S107 in the communication method provided by the present application. That is to say, in some scenarios, in the above methods of the embodiments of the present application, the technical means described in S107-S110 may be implemented independently without using the methods provided in S101-S103, so as to achieve corresponding technical effects.
此外,考虑到:一方面,在RLM或链路恢复过程中,UE可能需要根据SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,来确定用于RLM或链路恢复过程的参考信号。另一方面,接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,通常是通过承载在PDSCH信道的MAC CE进行传输的。而当SCG处于去激活状态下,UE可能无法接收到辅节点的PDSCH。这就导致UE无法获取SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,进而无法对SCG进行RLM或链路恢复过程。In addition, consider: on the one hand, in the RLM or link recovery process, the UE may need to determine the reference signal for the RLM or link recovery process according to the active TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG. On the other hand, the active TCI state of the received PDCCH is usually transmitted through the MAC CE carried on the PDSCH channel. However, when the SCG is in a deactivated state, the UE may not be able to receive the PDSCH of the secondary node. As a result, the UE cannot obtain the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus cannot perform the RLM or link recovery process on the SCG.
因此,在一种实现方式中,在UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,如图8所示,本实施例所提供方法还可以包括:Therefore, in an implementation manner, when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, as shown in FIG. 8 , the method provided in this embodiment may further include:
S111、UE的辅节点向主节点发送第二信息。S111. The secondary node of the UE sends the second information to the primary node.
其中,第二信息包括激活TCI状态信息。Wherein, the second information includes activated TCI state information.
其中,上述激活TCI状态信息,用于UE接收SCG的PDCCH。换句话讲,上述激活TCI状态信息,用于指示SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态。The above activated TCI state information is used for the UE to receive the PDCCH of the SCG. In other words, the above-mentioned activated TCI status information is used to indicate the activated TCI status of the receiving PDCCH of the SCG.
其中,辅节点可以通过来自UE的SRS,获得满足条件的参考信号(例如CSI-RS),进而调整SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,以将上述满足条件的参考信号所对应的TCI状态作为激活TCI状态。即辅节点确定第二信息所包括的激活TCI状态信息,用于指示上述满足条件的参考信号所对应的TCI状态。The secondary node can obtain a reference signal (such as CSI-RS) that meets the conditions through the SRS from the UE, and then adjust the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, so as to use the TCI state corresponding to the above-mentioned reference signal that meets the conditions as the activation TCI status. That is, the secondary node determines that the activated TCI state information included in the second information is used to indicate the TCI state corresponding to the reference signal that satisfies the condition.
或者,UE可以将UE在SCG中监听到的参考信号的测量结果通过主节点发送给辅节点,进而辅节点可以根据UE在SCG中监听到的参考信号的测量结果,确定第二信息的内容。Alternatively, the UE may send the measurement result of the reference signal monitored by the UE in the SCG to the secondary node through the master node, and the secondary node may determine the content of the second information according to the measurement result of the reference signal monitored by the UE in the SCG.
S112、主节点向UE发送第一信息。S112. The master node sends the first information to the UE.
其中,第一信息包括上述激活TCI状态信息。Wherein, the first information includes the above-mentioned activated TCI state information.
S113、UE基于激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,获取对SCG的链路信号质量的评估结果。S113: The UE obtains an evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
也就是说,上述设计中,在UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,可以通过由辅节点先 将激活TCI状态信息发送至主节点,再由主节点将激活TCI状态信息发送至UE的这种方式,来将激活TCI状态信息发送至UE。这样一来,便可以避免UE无法获取SCG的接收PDCCH的激活TCI状态,进而无法对SCG进行RLM或链路恢复过程。That is to say, in the above design, when the SCG of the UE is in the deactivated state, the secondary node can first send the activated TCI status information to the master node, and then the master node can send the activated TCI status information to the UE. , to send the active TCI status information to the UE. In this way, it can be avoided that the UE cannot obtain the activated TCI state of the received PDCCH of the SCG, and thus cannot perform the RLM or link recovery process on the SCG.
其中,当将上述S111-S113的内容与上述根据SCG的不同状态(去激活状态或激活状态)选择不同评估周期对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估(例如S101-S103)的内容相结合后,上述S113或者说上述S101具体可以包括:Wherein, when the content of the above S111-S113 is combined with the above-mentioned content of evaluating the link signal quality of the SCG (for example, S101-S103) by selecting different evaluation periods according to different states of the SCG (deactivated state or activated state), The above S113 or the above S101 may specifically include:
UE基于激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果。The UE obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
其中,根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果的具体实现方式,可参照上述S101中的相关描述。然后,在UE得到第一评估结果后,便可以参照上述S103的相应描述,对SCG进行无线链路监测或链路恢复过程。For a specific implementation manner of acquiring the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above S101. Then, after the UE obtains the first evaluation result, it may perform a radio link monitoring or link recovery process on the SCG with reference to the corresponding description of the above S103.
需要说明的是,在一些场景中,UE也可以不按照上述根据SCG的不同状态(去激活状态或激活状态)选择不同评估周期对SCG的链路信号质量进行评估(即S101-S103)的方式,而采用其他方式进行RLM测量或者无线链路恢复。当UE不按照上述S101-S103的方式进行RLM测量或者无线链路恢复时,上述S111-S113所提供方法也可以单独实施,以实现相应的技术效果,对此本申请可以不做限制。It should be noted that, in some scenarios, the UE may not select different evaluation periods according to the different states of the SCG (deactivated state or activated state) to evaluate the link signal quality of the SCG (ie, S101-S103). , and use other methods to perform RLM measurement or radio link recovery. When the UE does not perform RLM measurement or radio link recovery in the manner of S101-S103, the methods provided in S111-S113 can also be implemented independently to achieve corresponding technical effects, which are not limited in this application.
下面对上述设计中第一信息和第二信息的不同实现方式进行说明:The following describes different implementations of the first information and the second information in the above design:
实现方式一:第一信息可以为第一RRC消息,第二信息可以为第二RRC消息。其中,第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,并且激活TCI状态信息包括在第二RRC消息中。Implementation manner 1: the first information may be a first RRC message, and the second information may be a second RRC message. Wherein, the first RRC message includes the second RRC message, and the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message.
也就是说,本申请中可以通过辅节点将激活TCI状态信息携带在RRC消息(称为第二RRC消息)中发送至主节点。例如,当辅节点是CU/DU架构时,辅节点的DU可以将激活TCI状态信息发送至辅节点的CU,然后辅节点的CU生成一个RRC消息(即第二RRC消息),然后将第二RRC消息发送至主节点。另外,第二信息可以辅基站向主节点发送的接口消息(例如s-node addition request acknowledge、s-node modification request acknowledge、s-node modification required)中携带的。That is, in this application, the activated TCI state information may be carried in an RRC message (referred to as a second RRC message) by the secondary node and sent to the primary node. For example, when the secondary node is in a CU/DU architecture, the DU of the secondary node can send the activated TCI status information to the CU of the secondary node, and then the CU of the secondary node generates an RRC message (ie, the second RRC message), and then sends the second RRC message to the CU of the secondary node. The RRC message is sent to the master node. In addition, the second information may be carried in an interface message (for example, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node modification request acknowledge, s-node modification required) sent by the secondary base station to the master node.
然后主节点再将第二RRC消息封装至RRC消息(称为第一RRC消息)中发送至UE的这种方式,以将激活TCI状态信息发送至UE。其中,第二RRC消息是辅节点生成的。第一RRC消息是主节点生成的。The master node then encapsulates the second RRC message into an RRC message (referred to as the first RRC message) in such a way that it is sent to the UE, so as to send the active TCI status information to the UE. The second RRC message is generated by the secondary node. The first RRC message is generated by the master node.
实现方式二:第一信息可以为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。另外,第二信息可以是以一种主节点能感知的方式发送至主节点,比如第二信息可以是以在辅基站向主节点发送的接口消息(例如s-node addition request acknowledge、s-node modification request acknowledge、s-node modification required)中以信元显式方式携带的。Implementation mode 2: The first information may be an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE. In addition, the second information may be sent to the master node in a manner that the master node can perceive. For example, the second information may be an interface message (for example, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node addition request acknowledge, s-node) sent from the secondary base station to the master node. modification request acknowledge and s-node modification required) are carried in the explicit way of cells.
也就是说,在实现方式二中,辅节点可以通过主节点能感知的方式,例如发送接口消息的方式,将第二信息发送至主节点,以使得主节点能够对第二信息进行解析,获取第二信息中携带的激活TCI状态信息。例如,当辅节点是CU/DU架构时,可以通过由辅节点的DU将激活TCI状态发送至辅节点的CU,然后辅节点的CU生成一个接口消息,然后将第二信息发送至主节点。That is to say, in the second implementation, the secondary node can send the second information to the primary node in a way that the primary node can perceive, for example, by sending an interface message, so that the primary node can parse the second information and obtain The activated TCI state information carried in the second information. For example, when the secondary node is in a CU/DU architecture, the DU of the secondary node can send the active TCI status to the CU of the secondary node, and then the CU of the secondary node generates an interface message, and then sends the second information to the primary node.
然后,在主节点对第二信息进行解析获取激活TCI状态信息后,主节点可以通过将激活TCI状态信息携带在RRC消息或MAC CE(即第一信息)中并发送至UE的这一方式,来实现主节点向UE发送激活TCI状态信息。例如,当主节点是CU/DU架构时,当主节点通过解析接口消息获得激活TCI状态信息后,主节点的CU将该激活TCI状态信息发送至主节点的DU,然后主节点的DU生成MAC CE,并将生成的MAC CE发送至UE。Then, after the master node parses the second information to obtain the activated TCI state information, the master node can carry the activated TCI state information in the RRC message or the MAC CE (that is, the first information) and send it to the UE, To realize that the master node sends the active TCI status information to the UE. For example, when the master node is a CU/DU architecture, after the master node obtains the activated TCI state information by parsing the interface message, the CU of the master node sends the activated TCI state information to the DU of the master node, and then the DU of the master node generates a MAC CE, And send the generated MAC CE to the UE.
基于实现方式二,第一信息中还可以包括第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息用于指示上述激活TCI状态信息为SCG的TCI状态信息。Based on the second implementation, the first information may further include third indication information. The third indication information is used to indicate that the above-mentioned activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
其中,考虑到当第一信息为RRC消息或MAC CE时,为了使UE能够知道第一信息中所包括的激活TCI状态信息是MCG的TCI状态信息还是SCG的TCI状态信息,因此第一信息中还包括上述第三指示信息。Wherein, considering that when the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE, in order to enable the UE to know whether the activated TCI state information included in the first information is the TCI state information of the MCG or the TCI state information of the SCG, the first information contains The above-mentioned third indication information is also included.
考虑到:一方面,对于链路恢复过程而言,当UE的MAC层收到PSCell的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息(即说明该PSCell的beam失败)时,UE会触发在PSCell的随机接入过程;另外,当UE的MAC层收到辅节点中SCell的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息(即说明该SCell的beam失败)时,UE向辅节点发送BFR MAC CE。另一方面,目前协议中,对于SCG处于去激活状态时,UE如何向SCG发起随机接入过程的方法还没有确定,这就导致UE无法在SCG中发起随机接入过程,也就无法完成对PSCell的链路恢复过程;另外,当SCG处于去激活状态时,UE可能不会向SCG发送上行数据,即无法发送BFR MAC CE。Consider: on the one hand, for the link recovery process, when the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail (that is, indicating that the beams of the PSCell have failed), the UE will trigger a random connection on the PSCell. In addition, when the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the SCell in the secondary node fail (that is, indicating that the beam of the SCell fails), the UE sends the BFR MAC CE to the secondary node. On the other hand, in the current protocol, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, the method of how the UE initiates the random access procedure to the SCG has not yet been determined, which results in the UE not being able to initiate the random access procedure in the SCG, and thus unable to complete the pairing process. The link recovery process of PSCell; in addition, when the SCG is in the deactivated state, the UE may not send uplink data to the SCG, that is, the BFR MAC CE cannot be sent.
因此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法用于SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,当检测到PSCell或SCell的beam失败时,使UE能够在PSCell进行随机接入过程,或者使UE能够向辅节点发送BFR MAC CE,以完成对PSCell或SCell的链路恢复过程。Therefore, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used in the case where the SCG is in a deactivated state, and when the beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the UE can perform a random access procedure in the PSCell, or the UE can perform a random access procedure in the PSCell. A BFR MAC CE can be sent to the secondary node to complete the link recovery process to PSCell or SCell.
具体的,如图9所示,该方法包括以下步骤:Specifically, as shown in Figure 9, the method includes the following steps:
S201、UE检测SCG中的第一小区的beam失败。S201. The UE fails to detect the beam of the first cell in the SCG.
其中,SCG处于去激活状态,第一小区为SCG中的PSCell或SCell。The SCG is in a deactivated state, and the first cell is a PSCell or an SCell in the SCG.
可选的,SCG中的第一小区的beam失败,可以指:当UE的MAC层从物理层收到一个SCG的第一小区的一个beam失败指示信息时,UE的MAC层会启动或重启一个定时器,并记录当前接收的beam失败指示信息次数加1。如果在定时器超时之前,UE的MAC层收到该第一小区的一定数目的beam失败指示信息时,则认为SCG中的第一小区的beam失败。Optionally, the beam failure of the first cell in the SCG may refer to: when the MAC layer of the UE receives a beam failure indication information of the first cell of an SCG from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a beam failure. Timer, and record the number of beam failure indication information currently received plus 1. If the MAC layer of the UE receives a certain number of beam failure indication information of the first cell before the timer expires, it is considered that the beam of the first cell in the SCG has failed.
S202、UE在SCG中的PSCell的第一BWP发起随机接入过程。S202, the UE initiates a random access procedure at the first BWP of the PSCell in the SCG.
其中,当第一小区为PSCell时,通过在UE检测到PSCell的beam失败时,在SCG中的PSCell的BWP发起随机接入过程。从而保证对PSCell的链路恢复过程的顺利完成。Wherein, when the first cell is a PSCell, when the UE detects that the beam of the PSCell fails, the BWP of the PSCell in the SCG initiates a random access procedure. Thus, the successful completion of the link recovery process to the PSCell is ensured.
当第一小区为SCell时,通过在UE检测到SCell的beam失败时,在SCG中的PSCell的BWP发起随机接入过程。这样一来,UE便可以通过PSCell向SCG发送上行数据,即发送BFR MAC CE,进而保证对SCell的链路恢复过程的顺利完成。When the first cell is an SCell, when the UE detects that the beam of the SCell fails, the BWP of the PSCell in the SCG initiates a random access procedure. In this way, the UE can send uplink data to the SCG through the PSCell, that is, send the BFR MAC CE, thereby ensuring the successful completion of the link recovery process to the SCell.
因此,在一种实现方式中,当第一小区为SCell时,该方法还包括:Therefore, in an implementation manner, when the first cell is an SCell, the method further includes:
S203、当在第一BWP发起的随机接入过程成功后,UE向辅节点发送第一MAC CE。S203. After the random access procedure initiated by the first BWP is successful, the UE sends the first MAC CE to the secondary node.
其中,第一MAC CE,用于指示第一小区的beam失败。Wherein, the first MAC CE is used to indicate the beam failure of the first cell.
在一种实现方式中,第一BWP可以是PSCell的初始BWP。In one implementation, the first BWP may be the initial BWP of the PSCell.
在一种可能的设计中,上述方法还包括:In a possible design, the above method further includes:
S204、UE在第一BWP发起随机接入过程后,从第一BWP切换至PSCell的dormant BWP。S204. After the first BWP initiates the random access procedure, the UE switches from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
例如,当第一小区为PSCell时,UE在第一BWP发起随机接入过程后,便完成了对PSCell的链路恢复过程,然后通过从第一BWP切换至PSCell的dormant BWP,便可以使PSCell恢复到去激活状态,以节省UE的电量,同时减少了网络侧重新给UE发送进入去激活状态的命令,也减少了开销。For example, when the first cell is a PSCell, after the UE initiates the random access process in the first BWP, the link recovery process for the PSCell is completed, and then the PSCell can be switched from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell. Restoring to the deactivated state saves the power of the UE, and at the same time reduces the network side re-sending the command to enter the deactivated state to the UE, and also reduces the overhead.
再例如,当第一小区为SCell时,如上文S202描述,UE在第一BWP发起随机接入过程后,便可以通过PSCell向SCG发送BFR MAC CE,以完成对SCell的链路恢复过程。然后从第一BWP切换至PSCell的dormant BWP,便可以使PSCell恢复到去激活状态,以节省UE的电量,同时减少了网络侧重新给UE发送进入dormant BWP的命令,也减少了开销。For another example, when the first cell is an SCell, as described in S202 above, after the UE initiates the random access procedure in the first BWP, the UE can send a BFR MAC CE to the SCG through the PSCell to complete the link recovery process for the SCell. Then switch from the first BWP to the dormant BWP of the PSCell, so that the PSCell can be restored to the deactivated state, so as to save the power of the UE, and at the same time, the network side re-sends the command to the UE to enter the dormant BWP, and the overhead is also reduced.
在另一种可能的设计中,第一BWP可以是PSCell的dormant BWP。In another possible design, the first BWP may be the dormant BWP of the PSCell.
需要说明的是,当上述图3所示通信方法应用于链路恢复过程时,可以将上述图9所示通信方法应用到图3所示方法中,以在图3所示方法中解决图9所示方法所解决的技术问题、实现图9所示方法所实现的技术效果。It should be noted that, when the communication method shown in FIG. 3 is applied to the link recovery process, the communication method shown in FIG. 9 may be applied to the method shown in FIG. 3 to solve the problem in the method shown in FIG. 3 . The technical problem solved by the method shown in FIG. 9 realizes the technical effect achieved by the method shown in FIG. 9 .
例如,在图3所示方法中,当UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,UE先根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的联络信号指令的第一评估结果。然后UE根据第一评估结果,对SCG进行链路恢复过程。其中,在链路恢复过程中,若UE的MAC层收到第一小区的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息,则说明该第一小区的beam失败。例如,通过S107可以在每个第一指示周期获取之前一个第一评估周期的第一评估结果后,若第一评估结果指示UE的物理层用
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000026
中的所有RS评估链路信号质量都比门限Q out,LR差,则UE的物理层向MAC层上报beam失败的指示信息。当UE的MAC层收到PSCell的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息时,则说明该第一小区的beam失败。
For example, in the method shown in FIG. 3 , when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE first obtains the first evaluation result of the contact signal instruction of the SCG according to the first evaluation period. Then, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result. Wherein, in the link recovery process, if the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the first cell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail. For example, through S107, after obtaining the first evaluation result of the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, if the first evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000026
If all the RSs in the evaluation link signal quality are worse than the threshold Q out,LR , the physical layer of the UE reports the beam failure indication information to the MAC layer. When the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
然后,利用图9所示方法,UE可以通过在SCG中的PSCell的第一BWP发起随机接入过程,进而可以保证对第一小区的链路恢复过程可以顺利完成。Then, using the method shown in FIG. 9 , the UE can initiate a random access procedure through the first BWP of the PSCell in the SCG, thereby ensuring that the link recovery procedure to the first cell can be successfully completed.
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法用于UE的SCG处于去激活状态的情况下,当检测到PSCell或SCell的beam失败时,完成对PSCell或SCell的链路恢复过程。The embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used in the case where the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, when a beam failure of the PSCell or the SCell is detected, the link recovery process for the PSCell or the SCell is completed.
具体的,如图10所示,该方法包括以下步骤:Specifically, as shown in Figure 10, the method includes the following steps:
S301、当SCG处于去激活状态时,UE通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息。S301. When the SCG is in a deactivated state, the UE sends fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node.
其中,第四指示信息用于指示SCG中的第一小区的beam失败。或者说,第四指示信息用于指示UE准备在第一小区进行beam恢复过程。其中,第一小区可以为SCG中的PSCell或SCell。可选的,指示SCG中的第一小区的beam失败是指:当UE的MAC层从物理层收到一个SCG的第一小区的一个beam失败指示信息时,UE的MAC 层会启动或重启一个定时器,并记录当前接收的beam失败指示信息次数加1。如果在定时器超时之前,UE的MAC层收到该第一小区的一定数目的beam失败指示信息时,则认为SCG中的第一小区的beam失败。The fourth indication information is used to indicate beam failure of the first cell in the SCG. In other words, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UE to prepare to perform the beam recovery process in the first cell. Wherein, the first cell may be a PSCell or an SCell in the SCG. Optionally, indicating the beam failure of the first cell in the SCG refers to: when the MAC layer of the UE receives a beam failure indication information of the first cell of the SCG from the physical layer, the MAC layer of the UE will start or restart a beam failure. Timer, and record the number of beam failure indication information currently received plus 1. If the MAC layer of the UE receives a certain number of beam failure indication information of the first cell before the timer expires, it is considered that the beam of the first cell in the SCG has failed.
另外,第四指示信息中,还可以携带UE在SCell中测量的信号质量好于一定门限的候选beam的索引。In addition, the fourth indication information may also carry an index of a candidate beam whose signal quality measured by the UE in the SCell is better than a certain threshold.
S302、辅节点接收来自主节点的第四指示消息。S302. The secondary node receives the fourth indication message from the primary node.
上述方法中,考虑到在链路恢复过程中,当UE的MAC层收到PSCell或SCell的一定数目的beam失败信息时,无论是UE在PSCell发起随机接入过程,还是UE向辅节点发送BFR MAC CE,都是为了向辅节点通知PSCell或SCell的beam失败。因此,上述方法中,通过UE通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息,从而可以在UE不向辅节点发送上行数据的前提下,向辅节点通知第一小区(PSCell或SCell)的beam失败。In the above method, considering that during the link recovery process, when the MAC layer of the UE receives a certain number of beam failure information of the PSCell or SCell, whether the UE initiates a random access procedure in the PSCell, or the UE sends a BFR to the secondary node. MAC CE is used to notify the secondary node of PSCell or SCell beam failure. Therefore, in the above method, the UE sends the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node, so that the secondary node can be notified of the beam failure of the first cell (PSCell or SCell) on the premise that the UE does not send uplink data to the secondary node. .
需要说明的是,当上述图3所示通信方法应用于链路恢复过程时,可以将上述图10所示通信方法应用到图3所示方法中,以在图3所示方法中解决图10所示方法所解决的技术问题、实现图10所示方法所实现的技术效果。It should be noted that when the communication method shown in FIG. 3 is applied to the link recovery process, the communication method shown in FIG. 10 may be applied to the method shown in FIG. 3 to solve the problem in the method shown in FIG. 3 . The technical problem solved by the method shown in FIG. 10 realizes the technical effect achieved by the method shown in FIG. 10 .
例如,在图3所示方法中,当UE的SCG处于去激活状态时,UE先根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的联络信号指令的第一评估结果。然后UE根据第一评估结果,对SCG进行链路恢复过程。其中,在链路恢复过程中,若UE的MAC层收到第一小区的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息,则说明该第一小区的beam失败。例如,通过S107可以在每个第一指示周期获取之前一个第一评估周期的第一评估结果后,若第一评估结果指示UE的物理层用
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000027
中的所有RS评估链路信号质量都比门限Q out,LR差,则UE的物理层向MAC层上报beam失败的指示信息。当UE的MAC层收到PSCell的一定数目的beam失败的指示信息时,则说明该第一小区的beam失败。
For example, in the method shown in FIG. 3 , when the SCG of the UE is in a deactivated state, the UE first obtains the first evaluation result of the contact signal instruction of the SCG according to the first evaluation period. Then, the UE performs a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result. Wherein, in the link recovery process, if the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the first cell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail. For example, through S107, after obtaining the first evaluation result of the previous first evaluation cycle in each first indication cycle, if the first evaluation result indicates that the physical layer of the UE uses
Figure PCTCN2020107660-appb-000027
If all the RSs in the evaluation link signal quality are worse than the threshold Q out,LR , the physical layer of the UE reports the beam failure indication information to the MAC layer. When the MAC layer of the UE receives the indication information that a certain number of beams of the PSCell fail, it means that the beams of the first cell fail.
然后,利用图10所示方法,UE可以通过通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息,进而可以在UE不向辅节点发送上行数据的前提下,向辅节点通知第一小区(PSCell或SCell)的beam失败。Then, using the method shown in FIG. 10 , the UE can send the fourth indication information to the secondary node through the primary node, and then can notify the secondary node of the first cell (PSCell or SCell) on the premise that the UE does not send uplink data to the secondary node. ) beam fails.
可以理解的,本申请实施例中,UE和/或网络设备可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例中,还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。本申请提供的实施例之间是可以关联的,并且可以相互参考或引用。It can be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, the UE and/or the network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are only examples. In the embodiments of the present application, other operations or various operations may also be performed. Variation of an operation. In addition, various steps may be performed in different orders presented in the embodiments of the present application, and may not be required to perform all the operations in the embodiments of the present application. The embodiments provided in this application may be related to each other, and may be referred to or referenced to each other.
以上实施例主要从设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。应理解,上述UE或主节点或辅节点为了实现对应的功能,其包括了执行各功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above embodiments mainly introduce the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of interaction between devices. It should be understood that, in order to implement the corresponding functions, the above-mentioned UE or the master node or the auxiliary node includes corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for executing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the unit of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in hardware or in the form of a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对设备(包括UE或主节点或辅节点)进行 功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。可选的,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment of the present application, the device (including the UE or the master node or the auxiliary node) may be divided into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated. in a processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, and can also be implemented in the form of software function modules. Optionally, the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and another division manner may be used in actual implementation.
如图11所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置40的组成示意图。通信装置40可以是UE中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置40可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的UE的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置40包括:As shown in FIG. 11 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication apparatus 40 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 40 may be a chip or a system on a chip in the UE. The communication apparatus 40 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 40 includes:
处理单元401,用于当UE的辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果;A processing unit 401, configured to obtain a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to a first evaluation period when the SCG of the secondary cell group of the UE is in a deactivated state;
处理单元401,还用于当所述SCG处于激活状态时,根据第二评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果;The processing unit 401 is further configured to obtain a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period when the SCG is in an active state;
处理单元401,还用于据所述第一评估结果或第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程。The processing unit 401 is further configured to perform wireless link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置40还包括:In a possible design, the communication device 40 further includes:
接收单元402,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一评估周期;所述网络设备为所述UE的主节点或辅节点。The receiving unit 402 is configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the UE.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置40还包括:In a possible design, the communication device 40 further includes:
接收单元402,用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述UE的主节点或辅节点;a receiving unit 402, configured to receive first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the UE;
处理单元401,还用于根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子,确定所述第一评估周期。The processing unit 401 is further configured to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一评估周期是预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的评估周期。In a possible design, the first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元401,还用于根据第一指示周期,使所述UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果对应的指示信息,或者,根据第二指示周期,使所述UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第二评估结果对应的指示信息。In a possible design, the processing unit 401 is further configured to make the physical layer of the UE report the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period, or, according to the second indication period, causing the physical layer of the UE to report the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元402,用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一指示周期;所述网络设备为所述UE的主节点或辅节点。In a possible design, the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is the master of the UE node or secondary node.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元402,用于接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示第二缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述UE的主节点或辅节点。In a possible design, the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the UE or Secondary node.
处理单元401,还用于根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。The processing unit 401 is further configured to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一指示周期是预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。In a possible design, the first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
在一种可能的设计中,接收单元402,用于当所述SCG处于去激活状态时,接收来自主节点的第一信息;所述第一信息包括:激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述UE接收所述SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;In a possible design, the receiving unit 402 is configured to receive first information from a master node when the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI state information; the Activate TCI status information for the UE to receive the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG;
在一种可能的设计中,处理单元401,还用于基于所述激活TCI状态信息对应的 参考信号,根据第一评估周期获取对所述SCG的链路信号质量的所述第一评估结果。In a possible design, the processing unit 401 is further configured to obtain the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为第一RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,所述激活TCI状态信息包括在所述第二RRC消息中;所述第二RRC消息是来自辅节点的RRC消息。In a possible design, the first information is a first RRC message, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message, and the activated TCI state information is included in the second RRC message; the first RRC message includes a second RRC message. The second RRC message is the RRC message from the secondary node.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
如图12所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置50的组成示意图。该通信装置50可以是网络设备(如UE的主节点或辅节点)中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置50可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的网络设备的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置50包括:As shown in FIG. 12 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 50 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication apparatus 50 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a network device (eg, a master node or a slave node of a UE). The communication apparatus 50 may be used to perform the functions of the network equipment involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 50 includes:
发送单元501,用于向UE发送第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息,用于指示第一评估周期,或者用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述UE的主节点或辅节点;其中,所述第一评估周期,用于指示所述UE在辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据所述第一评估周期获取第一评估结果;所述第一评估结果用于对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程;所述第一缩放因子,用于指示所述UE根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子确定所述第一评估周期。A sending unit 501 is configured to send first indication information to a UE; the first indication information is used to indicate a first evaluation period or a first scaling factor; the network device is the master node of the UE or A secondary node; wherein the first evaluation period is used to instruct the UE to obtain a first evaluation result according to the first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the first evaluation result is used for Perform radio link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the UE to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
在一种可能的设计中,发送单元501,还用于向所述UE发送第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息,用于指示第一指示周期或第二缩放因子;其中,所述第一指示周期,用于指示所述UE根据所述第一指示周期,所述UE的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果;所述第二缩放因子,用于指示所述UE根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。In a possible design, the sending unit 501 is further configured to send second indication information to the UE; the second indication information is used to indicate a first indication period or a second scaling factor; wherein the first indication An indication period is used to instruct the UE to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor is used to instruct the UE to report the first evaluation result to the upper layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; The third indication period and the second scaling factor determine the first indication period.
如图13所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置60的组成示意图。该通信装置60可以是主节点中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置60可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的主节点的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置60包括:As shown in FIG. 13 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 60 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 60 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the master node. The communication device 60 may be used to perform the functions of the master node involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 60 includes:
接收单元601,用于接收来自辅节点的第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述UE接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;A receiving unit 601, configured to receive second information from a secondary node, where the second information includes activated transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used by the UE to receive the secondary cell group of the secondary node The physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state;
发送单元602,用于向所述UE发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括所述激活TCI状态信息。A sending unit 602, configured to send first information to the UE, where the first information includes the activated TCI state information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息为第二无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一信息为第一RRC消息;所述第一RRC消息包括所述第二RRC消息。In a possible design, the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message, and the first information is a first RRC message; the first RRC message includes the second RRC message.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。In a possible design, the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element MAC CE.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。In a possible design, the first information further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
如图14所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置70的组成示意图。该通信装置70可以是辅节点中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置70可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的辅节点的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置70包括:As shown in FIG. 14 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 70 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 70 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the secondary node. The communication apparatus 70 may be used to perform the functions of the secondary node involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 70 includes:
发送单元701,用于向主节点发送第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述UE接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态。The sending unit 701 is configured to send second information to the master node, where the second information includes TCI status information of an active transmission configuration indication; the active TCI status information is used for the UE to receive the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node The physical downlink control channel PDCCH; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第二信息是所述辅节点发给所述主节点的RRC消息,或所述第二信息是所述辅节点与所述主节点之间的接口消息。In a possible design, the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is an interface message between the secondary node and the primary node.
如图15所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置80的组成示意图。该通信装置80可以是UE中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置80可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的UE的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置80包括:As shown in FIG. 15 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 80 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 80 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the UE. The communication apparatus 80 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 80 includes:
处理单元801,用于检测辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell;A processing unit 801, configured to detect beam beam failure of a first cell in a secondary cell group SCG; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG;
处理单元801,还用于在所述SCG中的主辅小区PSCell的第一部分带宽BWP发起随机接入过程。The processing unit 801 is further configured to initiate a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the primary and secondary cells PSCell in the SCG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的初始BWP。处理单元801,还用于在所述随机接入过程后,从所述初始BWP切换至所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。In one possible design, the first BWP is the initial BWP of the PSCell. The processing unit 801 is further configured to switch from the initial BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell after the random access process.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。In one possible design, the first BWP is the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell.
在一种可能的设计中,当所述第一小区为SCell时,通信装置80还包括:In a possible design, when the first cell is an SCell, the communication apparatus 80 further includes:
发送单元802,用于在所述随机接入过程成功后,向辅节点发送第一介质访问控制控制元素MAC CE;所述第一MAC CE,用于指示所述第一小区的beam失败。The sending unit 802 is configured to send a first medium access control control element MAC CE to the secondary node after the random access process is successful; the first MAC CE is used to indicate that the beam of the first cell fails.
如图16所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置90的组成示意图。该通信装置90可以是UE中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置90可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的UE的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置90包括:As shown in FIG. 16 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 90 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 90 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the UE. The communication apparatus 90 may be used to perform the functions of the UE involved in the above embodiments. As an implementable manner, the communication device 90 includes:
发送单元901,用于当辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息;所述第四指示信息用于指示所述SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的所述PSCell或辅小区SCell。The sending unit 901 is configured to send fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG fails ; the first cell is the PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
如图17所示,为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置100的组成示意图。该通信装置100可以是UE的辅节点中的芯片或片上系统。该通信装置100可以用于执行上述实施例中涉及的辅节点的功能。作为一种可实现方式,该通信装置100包括:As shown in FIG. 17 , it is a schematic diagram of the composition of another communication apparatus 100 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication apparatus 100 may be a chip or a system-on-chip in the secondary node of the UE. The communication apparatus 100 may be used to perform the functions of the secondary node involved in the above embodiments. As an implementation manner, the communication device 100 includes:
接收单元1001,用于接收来自所述UE的主节点的第四指示消息,所述第四指示信息用于指示辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败。The receiving unit 1001 is configured to receive a fourth indication message from the master node of the UE, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate beam beam failure of the first cell in the secondary cell group SCG.
在一种可能的设计中,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。In a possible design, the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
可以理解,关于上述通信装置40-100中的各个单元的功能的具体描述可以参照方法实施例,例如图3-图10所示实施例中对应的UE,或者网络设备(主节点或者辅节点)执行的相关步骤的描述,在此不做赘述。It can be understood that for the specific description of the functions of the respective units in the foregoing communication apparatuses 40-100, reference may be made to the method embodiments, for example, the corresponding UEs in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3-FIG. 10, or network devices (master nodes or secondary nodes) The description of the relevant steps to be performed is not repeated here.
如图18示出了一种通信装置110的组成示意图。其中,通信装置110包括:至少一个处理器1101,以及至少一个接口电路1104。另外,该通信装置110还可以包括通 信线路1102,存储器1103。FIG. 18 shows a schematic composition diagram of a communication device 110 . The communication device 110 includes: at least one processor 1101 and at least one interface circuit 1104 . In addition, the communication device 110 may further include a communication line 1102 and a memory 1103.
处理器1101可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 1101 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
通信线路1102可包括一通路,在上述组件之间传送信息。 Communication line 1102 may include a path to communicate information between the components described above.
接口电路1104,使用任何收发器一类的装置,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信,如以太网,无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)等。 Interface circuit 1104, using any transceiver-like device, for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (RAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN), etc. .
存储器1103可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。存储器可以是独立存在,通过通信线路1102与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。 Memory 1103 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other types of information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, CD-ROM storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or capable of carrying or storing program code in the form of instructions or data structures and capable of being accessed by a computer any other medium, but not limited to. The memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through communication line 1102 . The memory can also be integrated with the processor.
其中,存储器1103用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令,并由处理器1101来控制执行。处理器1101用于执行存储器1103中存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现本申请实施例提供的通信方法。The memory 1103 is used for storing computer-executed instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1101 . The processor 1101 is configured to execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1103, thereby implementing the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
示例性地,在一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图3、图6-7所示的S101-S104,以及图4所示的S105、图5所示的S106和S107、图6所示的S108、图7所示的S109和S110、图8所示的S112和S113,以及UE需要执行的其他操作。Exemplarily, in some embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to execute S101-S104 shown in FIG. 3 , FIGS. 6-7 , and S105 shown in FIG. 4 . , S106 and S107 shown in FIG. 5 , S108 shown in FIG. 6 , S109 and S110 shown in FIG. 7 , S112 and S113 shown in FIG. 8 , and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图4所示的S105、图5所示的S106、图6所示的S108、图7所示的S109,以及网络设备需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to execute S105 shown in FIG. 4, S106 shown in FIG. 5, S108 shown in FIG. 6, and S108 shown in FIG. 7. S109 shown, and other operations that the network device needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图8所示的S111和S112,以及主节点需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S111 and S112 as shown in FIG. 8, as well as other operations that the master node needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图8所示的S111,以及辅节点需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S111 as shown in FIG. 8, and other operations that the secondary node needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图9所示的S201-S204,以及UE需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S201-S204 as shown in FIG. 9, and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图10所示的S301,以及UE需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S301 as shown in FIG. 10, and other operations that the UE needs to perform.
在另一些实施例中,当处理器1101执行存储器1103存储的指令时,使得该通信装置110执行如图10所示的S302,以及辅节点需要执行的其他操作。In other embodiments, when the processor 1101 executes the instructions stored in the memory 1103, the communication device 110 is caused to perform S302 as shown in FIG. 10, and other operations that the secondary node needs to perform.
可选的,本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the computer-executed instructions in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as application code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器1101可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图18中的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 1101 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 18 .
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,装置1100可以包括多个处理器,例如图18中的处理器1101和处理器1107。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理例如计数据(算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the apparatus 1100 may include multiple processors, such as the processor 1101 and the processor 1107 in FIG. 18 . Each of these processors can be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. A processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing, eg, computer data (computer program instructions).
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,装置1100还可以包括输出设备1105和输入设备1106。输出设备1105和处理器1101通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备1105可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备1106和处理器1101通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备1106可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the apparatus 1100 may further include an output device 1105 and an input device 1106 . The output device 1105 is in communication with the processor 1101 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 1105 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait. The input device 1106 is in communication with the processor 1101 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 1106 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当该指令运行时,执行本申请实施例所提供的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium, where an instruction is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the instruction is executed, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is executed.
本申请实施例还提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品。当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机可以执行本申请实施例所提供的方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product including instructions. When it runs on a computer, the computer can execute the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片。该芯片包括处理器。当处理器执行计算机程序指令时,使得芯片可以执行本申请实施例提供的方法。该指令可以来自芯片内部的存储器,也可以来自芯片外部的存储器。可选的,该芯片还包括作为通信接口的输入输出电路。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip. The chip includes a processor. When the processor executes the computer program instructions, the chip can execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present application. The instruction can come from memory inside the chip or from memory outside the chip. Optionally, the chip also includes an input and output circuit as a communication interface.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,包括第一节点和第二节点。Embodiments of the present application further provide a communication system, including a first node and a second node.
其中第一节点用于执行本申请上述实施例中UE的主节点需要执行的操作,第二节点用于执行本申请上述实施例中UE的辅节点需要执行的操作。The first node is configured to perform operations that need to be performed by the master node of the UE in the foregoing embodiments of the present application, and the second node is configured to perform operations that need to be performed by the secondary node of the UE in the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
例如,第一节点用于执行图8中的S111-S112,接收到来自第二节点的第二信息并向终端设备发送第一信息。第二节点用于执行图8中的S111,向第一节点发送第二信息。For example, the first node is configured to execute S111-S112 in FIG. 8, receive the second information from the second node and send the first information to the terminal device. The second node is configured to execute S111 in FIG. 8 and send the second information to the first node.
在上述实施例中的功能或动作或操作或步骤等,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包括一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。The functions or actions or operations or steps in the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or data storage devices including one or more servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the medium. The usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包括这些改动和变型在内。Although the application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, this specification and drawings are merely exemplary illustrations of the application as defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of this application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (34)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    当终端设备的辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,所述终端设备根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果;When the secondary cell group SCG of the terminal device is in a deactivated state, the terminal device acquires a first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period;
    当所述SCG处于激活状态时,所述终端设备根据第二评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第二评估结果;When the SCG is in the active state, the terminal device obtains a second evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the second evaluation period;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一评估结果或第二评估结果,对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程。The terminal device performs radio link monitoring or a link recovery process on the SCG according to the first evaluation result or the second evaluation result.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一评估周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。The terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;The terminal device receives first indication information from a network device; the first indication information is used to indicate a first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device;
    所述终端设备根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子,确定所述第一评估周期。The terminal device determines the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1, wherein:
    所述第一评估周期是预定的非连续接收DRX周期对应的评估周期。The first evaluation period is an evaluation period corresponding to a predetermined discontinuous reception DRX period.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据第一指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果对应的指示信息;According to the first indication period, the physical layer of the terminal device reports the indication information corresponding to the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack;
    或者,根据第二指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第二评估结果对应的指示信息。Or, according to the second indication period, the physical layer of the terminal device reports the indication information corresponding to the second evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一指示周期;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点。The terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息用于指示第二缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;The terminal device receives second indication information from a network device; the second indication information is used to indicate a second scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device;
    所述终端设备根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。The terminal device determines the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  8. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 5, wherein:
    所述第一指示周期是预定的DRX周期对应的指示周期。The first indication period is an indication period corresponding to a predetermined DRX period.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述SCG处于去激活状态时,所述终端设备接收来自主节点的第一信息;所述第一信息包括:激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于所述终端设备接收所述SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;When the SCG is in the deactivated state, the terminal device receives the first information from the master node; the first information includes: activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used for the terminal The device receives the physical downlink control channel PDCCH of the SCG;
    所述终端设备根据第一评估周期获取对SCG的链路信号质量的第一评估结果,包括:The terminal device obtains the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period, including:
    所述终端设备基于所述激活TCI状态信息对应的参考信号,根据第一评估周期获取对所述SCG的链路信号质量的所述第一评估结果。The terminal device acquires the first evaluation result of the link signal quality of the SCG according to the first evaluation period based on the reference signal corresponding to the activated TCI state information.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息为第一无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一RRC消息包括第二RRC消息,所述激活TCI状态信息包括在所述第二RRC消息中;所述第二RRC消息是来自辅节点的RRC消息。The method according to claim 9, wherein the first information is a first radio resource control RRC message, the first RRC message includes a second RRC message, and the activated TCI state information is included in the first RRC message. In two RRC messages; the second RRC message is an RRC message from the secondary node.
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。The method according to claim 9, wherein the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element (MAC CE).
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。The method according to claim 11, wherein the first information further comprises third indication information, wherein the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  13. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息;所述第一指示信息,用于指示第一评估周期,或者用于指示第一缩放因子;所述网络设备为所述终端设备的主节点或辅节点;The network device sends first indication information to the terminal device; the first indication information is used to indicate the first evaluation period, or used to indicate the first scaling factor; the network device is a master node or a secondary node of the terminal device ;
    其中,所述第一评估周期,用于指示所述终端设备在辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,根据所述第一评估周期获取第一评估结果;所述第一评估结果用于对SCG进行无线链路监测或进行链路恢复过程;所述第一缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三评估周期和所述第一缩放因子确定所述第一评估周期。Wherein, the first evaluation period is used to instruct the terminal device to obtain a first evaluation result according to the first evaluation period when the secondary cell group SCG is in a deactivated state; the first evaluation result is used to evaluate the SCG Perform wireless link monitoring or perform a link recovery process; the first scaling factor is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the first evaluation period according to the third evaluation period and the first scaling factor.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 13, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息;所述第二指示信息,用于指示第一指示周期或第二缩放因子;The network device sends second indication information to the terminal device; the second indication information is used to indicate the first indication period or the second scaling factor;
    其中,所述第一指示周期,用于指示所述终端设备根据所述第一指示周期,所述终端设备的物理层向上层协议栈上报所述第一评估结果;所述第二缩放因子,用于指示所述终端设备根据第三指示周期和所述第二缩放因子确定所述第一指示周期。The first indication period is used to instruct the terminal device to report the first evaluation result to the upper-layer protocol stack according to the first indication period; the second scaling factor, It is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the first indication period according to the third indication period and the second scaling factor.
  15. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    主节点接收来自辅节点的第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;The master node receives second information from the secondary node, where the second information includes activation transmission configuration indication TCI status information; the activated TCI status information is used by the terminal equipment to receive physical downlink control of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node channel PDCCH; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state;
    所述主节点向所述终端设备发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括所述激活TCI状态信息。The master node sends first information to the terminal device, where the first information includes the activated TCI state information.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息为第二无线资源控制RRC消息,所述第一信息为第一RRC消息;所述第一RRC消息包括所述第二RRC消息。The method according to claim 15, wherein the second information is a second radio resource control RRC message, the first information is a first RRC message; the first RRC message includes the second RRC message information.
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息为RRC消息或介质访问控制元素MAC CE。The method according to claim 15, wherein the first information is an RRC message or a medium access control element (MAC CE).
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述激活TCI状态信息为所述SCG的TCI状态信息。The method according to claim 17, wherein the first information further comprises third indication information, wherein the third indication information is used to indicate that the activated TCI state information is the TCI state information of the SCG.
  19. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    辅节点向主节点发送第二信息,所述第二信息包括激活传输配置指示TCI状态信息;所述激活TCI状态信息,用于终端设备接收所述辅节点的辅小区组SCG的物理下行控制信道PDCCH;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态。The secondary node sends second information to the primary node, where the second information includes TCI status information of an active transmission configuration indication; the activated TCI status information is used by the terminal device to receive the physical downlink control channel of the secondary cell group SCG of the secondary node PDCCH; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息是所述辅节点发给所述主节点的RRC消息,或所述第二信息是所述辅节点与所述主节点之间的接口消 息。The method according to claim 19, wherein the second information is an RRC message sent by the secondary node to the primary node, or the second information is a relationship between the secondary node and the primary node interface messages.
  21. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    终端设备检测辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;其中,所述SCG处于去激活状态;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的主辅小区PSCell或辅小区SCell;The terminal equipment fails to detect the beam beam of the first cell in the secondary cell group SCG; wherein, the SCG is in a deactivated state; the first cell is the primary and secondary cell PSCell or the secondary cell SCell in the SCG;
    所述终端设备在所述SCG中的所述PSCell的第一部分带宽BWP发起随机接入过程。The terminal device initiates a random access procedure in the first part of the bandwidth BWP of the PSCell in the SCG.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的初始BWP;The method of claim 21, wherein the first BWP is an initial BWP of the PSCell;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述终端设备在所述随机接入过程后,从所述第一BWP切换至所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。The terminal device switches from the first BWP to the dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell after the random access procedure.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一BWP是所述PSCell的休眠dormant BWP。The method of claim 21, wherein the first BWP is a dormant dormant BWP of the PSCell.
  24. 根据权利要求21-23任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一小区为SCell时,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 21-23, wherein when the first cell is an SCell, the method further comprises:
    在所述随机接入过程成功后,所述终端设备向辅节点发送第一介质访问控制控制元素MAC CE;所述第一MAC CE,用于指示所述第一小区的beam失败。After the random access procedure is successful, the terminal device sends a first medium access control element MAC CE to the secondary node; the first MAC CE is used to indicate that the beam of the first cell fails.
  25. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    当辅小区组SCG处于去激活状态时,终端设备通过主节点向辅节点发送第四指示信息;所述第四指示信息用于指示所述SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败;所述第一小区为所述SCG中的主辅小区PSCell或辅小区SCell。When the secondary cell group SCG is in the deactivated state, the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the secondary node through the master node; the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the beam beam of the first cell in the SCG fails; the first A cell is a primary and secondary cell PSCell or a secondary cell SCell in the SCG.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。The method according to claim 25, wherein the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  27. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    终端设备的辅节点接收来自所述终端设备的主节点的第四指示消息,所述第四指示信息用于指示辅小区组SCG中的第一小区的波束beam失败。The secondary node of the terminal device receives a fourth indication message from the primary node of the terminal device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate beam beam failure of the first cell in the secondary cell group SCG.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四指示信息是RRC消息,或者所述第四指示信息是MAC CE。The method according to claim 27, wherein the fourth indication information is an RRC message, or the fourth indication information is a MAC CE.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:至少一个处理器和接口电路,当所述处理器执行计算机程序指令时,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1-12中任一项,或者权利要求21-24任一项,或者权利要求25-26任一项,或者权利要求27-28任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device comprises: at least one processor and an interface circuit, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the communication device is made to execute any one of claims 1-12, or any one of claims 21-24, or any one of claims 25-26, or any one of claims 27-28.
  30. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:至少一个处理器和接口电路,当所述处理器执行计算机程序指令时,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求13-14任一项,或者权利要求15-18任一项,或者权利要求19-20任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that, the communication device comprises: at least one processor and an interface circuit, when the processor executes computer program instructions, the communication device causes the communication device to execute any one of claims 13-14, or The method of any one of claims 15-18, or any one of claims 19-20.
  31. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括第一节点和第二节点;其中:A communication system, comprising a first node and a second node; wherein:
    所述第一节点,用于执行权利要求15-18任一项所述的方法;the first node, configured to execute the method of any one of claims 15-18;
    所述第二节点,用于执行权利要求19-20任一项所述的方法。The second node is configured to execute the method of any one of claims 19-20.
  32. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片包括处理器,当所述处理器执行计算机程 序指令时,使得所述芯片执行权利要求1-12中任一项,或者权利要求13-14任一项,或者权利要求15-18任一项,或者权利要求19-20任一项,或者权利要求21-24任一项,或者权利要求25-26任一项,或者权利要求27-28任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that the chip includes a processor, and when the processor executes computer program instructions, the chip is made to execute any one of claims 1-12, or any one of claims 13-14 , or any of claims 15-18, or any of claims 19-20, or any of claims 21-24, or any of claims 25-26, or any of claims 27-28 the method described.
  33. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括:计算机软件指令;A computer-readable storage medium, comprising: computer software instructions;
    当所述计算机软件指令在通信装置或内置在所述通信装置的芯片中运行时,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1-12中任一项,或者权利要求13-14任一项,或者权利要求15-18任一项,或者权利要求19-20任一项,或者权利要求21-24任一项,或者权利要求25-26任一项,或者权利要求27-28任一项所述的方法。The computer software instructions, when run in a communication device or a chip built into the communication device, cause the communication device to perform any one of claims 1-12, or any one of claims 13-14, or a claim Any one of claims 15-18, or any one of claims 19-20, or any one of claims 21-24, or any one of claims 25-26, or any one of claims 27-28. method.
  34. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括指令,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行权利要求1-12中任一项,或者权利要求13-14任一项,或者权利要求15-18任一项,或者权利要求19-20任一项,或者权利要求21-24任一项,或者权利要求25-26任一项,或者权利要求27-28任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes instructions that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of claims 1-12, or claim 13- 14, or any of claims 15-18, or any of claims 19-20, or any of claims 21-24, or any of claims 25-26, or any of claims 27- 28 The method of any one.
PCT/CN2020/107660 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Communication method and apparatus WO2022027543A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/107660 WO2022027543A1 (en) 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Communication method and apparatus
CN202080104496.0A CN116134864A (en) 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Communication method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/107660 WO2022027543A1 (en) 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022027543A1 true WO2022027543A1 (en) 2022-02-10

Family

ID=80118966

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/107660 WO2022027543A1 (en) 2020-08-07 2020-08-07 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116134864A (en)
WO (1) WO2022027543A1 (en)

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102448078A (en) * 2010-10-09 2012-05-09 电信科学技术研究院 Monitoring processing method for radio link on auxiliary carrier and user equipment
WO2015171513A1 (en) * 2014-05-06 2015-11-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Optimization of mbsfn decoding on scells when the pcell and scells belong to same mbsfn area
CN107493588A (en) * 2016-06-12 2017-12-19 中国移动通信集团上海有限公司 A kind of terminal carrier aggregation configuration method and base station
US20180332501A1 (en) * 2017-05-14 2018-11-15 Yung-Lan TSENG Systems, methods, and devices for ultra-reliable low latency communication quality-of-service guarantee
CN110012549A (en) * 2018-01-04 2019-07-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of information transferring method, terminal and the network equipment
CN110022611A (en) * 2018-01-10 2019-07-16 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Realize the method, apparatus and user equipment of wave beam failure recovery
EP3525516A1 (en) * 2018-02-09 2019-08-14 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Beam failure recovery procedure in carrier aggregation
CN111093219A (en) * 2019-11-07 2020-05-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information determination method, information determination device, information determination corresponding relation determination device, information determination equipment and information determination medium
CN111385078A (en) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-07 成都华为技术有限公司 Method for assisting cell activation and communication device

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102448078A (en) * 2010-10-09 2012-05-09 电信科学技术研究院 Monitoring processing method for radio link on auxiliary carrier and user equipment
WO2015171513A1 (en) * 2014-05-06 2015-11-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Optimization of mbsfn decoding on scells when the pcell and scells belong to same mbsfn area
CN107493588A (en) * 2016-06-12 2017-12-19 中国移动通信集团上海有限公司 A kind of terminal carrier aggregation configuration method and base station
US20180332501A1 (en) * 2017-05-14 2018-11-15 Yung-Lan TSENG Systems, methods, and devices for ultra-reliable low latency communication quality-of-service guarantee
CN110012549A (en) * 2018-01-04 2019-07-12 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of information transferring method, terminal and the network equipment
CN110022611A (en) * 2018-01-10 2019-07-16 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Realize the method, apparatus and user equipment of wave beam failure recovery
EP3525516A1 (en) * 2018-02-09 2019-08-14 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Beam failure recovery procedure in carrier aggregation
CN111385078A (en) * 2018-12-29 2020-07-07 成都华为技术有限公司 Method for assisting cell activation and communication device
CN111093219A (en) * 2019-11-07 2020-05-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information determination method, information determination device, information determination corresponding relation determination device, information determination equipment and information determination medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116134864A (en) 2023-05-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11876744B2 (en) Secondary cell activation method, access network device, and communications apparatus and system
CN109391962B (en) Communication method and communication device
CN110249683B (en) Method and apparatus for beam fault recovery
WO2020167210A1 (en) Centralized unit-distributed unit communication associated to radio link failure report and beam failure recovery attempts
US20220191789A1 (en) Control Channel Monitoring in a Wireless Communication System
CN114747288A (en) Reporting listen before talk failure in wireless networks
JP2021519558A (en) Equipment, methods and computer programs
US20210251032A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
CN112106394A (en) Radio Link Monitoring (RLM) procedure for a wireless device configured to operate using a first mode of operation and a second mode of operation within overlapping times in a first cell
US20240007840A1 (en) Method for secondary cell state configuration, user equipment, and storage medium
US11470589B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
WO2021208631A1 (en) Neighboring cell measurement method and apparatus, and terminal
US20190132794A1 (en) Transmission Mode Switching Method and Apparatus
WO2022012440A1 (en) Physical downlink control channel (pdcch) monitoring method and apparatus, and terminal
WO2022077387A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20220385428A1 (en) Signal quality information obtaining method, device, and system
CN116349162A (en) Cross-carrier scheduling method, terminal equipment and access network equipment
US20230413077A1 (en) Beam failure detection
CN116982388A (en) Transmission in small data transmission mode
WO2023072298A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022027543A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
JP2024519220A (en) User equipment, scheduling node, method for user equipment, method for a scheduling node and integrated circuit - Patents.com
WO2023108416A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
JP7314439B1 (en) User equipment, node and communication method
WO2023147705A1 (en) Methods, devices, and computer readable medium for communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20948290

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20948290

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1